JP6386498B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  Conventionally, the right to win a jackpot lottery is acquired on the condition that a game ball wins at the starting gate. There is a game machine that can execute a special game that can win a large amount of prize balls by winning. Specifically, when a game ball is won at the start opening, it is stored in the special figure determination information storage area as special figure determination information, and the special figure determination stored in the special figure determination information storage area when the start condition is satisfied. The information is read and the big hit lottery is executed.

  The result of the big hit lottery is made to be recognized by the player by a fluctuating effect executed in an image display unit (liquid crystal display or the like) provided in the gaming machine. In order to improve the fun of the game, a lot of production patterns are stored in the variation production pattern table as variation productions showing the results of the jackpot lottery. When a game ball wins at the starting gate, A special variation pattern random number is acquired together with the design random number, and a specific variation effect is selected and executed from the variation effect pattern table.

  As one aspect of the variation effect, a game machine that performs a so-called pre-reading effect in which the content of the special figure determination information is determined in advance and the effect is performed based on the result of the prior determination is widely used. The pre-reading effect is an effect that is executed over a plurality of special symbol fluctuation displays. By executing the pre-reading effect, the player can be given a big hit expectation in advance, which Will improve.

  As one of the pre-reading effects, an image associated with each of the plurality of effects is displayed on the image display unit, and one image is selected from these images, and then associated with the selected image. A gaming machine configured to be able to execute an effect (so-called roulette effect) suggesting that an effect is performed has been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2013-223750 A

  By the way, the player generally determines whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is a big hit by determining whether or not the three effect symbols displayed on the image display unit are matched (stopped) and stops. The variation display of the production symbol is the most remarkable production. However, the roulette effect described above is performed regardless of the variation display of the effect symbol, and while the roulette effect is being performed, the variation display of the effect symbol is small so as not to be noticeable at one corner of the image display unit. .

  An object of this invention is to provide the gaming machine which can improve the interest of a game by the production | presentation using a production | presentation symbol.

  The gaming machine of the present invention has a special game determination means for performing a special game determination as to whether or not a special game is to be performed when a start condition is established, and a plurality of effects by an effect symbol display means based on the result of the special game determination. There are provided an effect control means for performing an effect using a pattern, and an advance determination means for making a prior determination as to whether or not to perform the special game before the special game determination is performed. An effect mode setting means for setting any effect mode among the effect modes and shifting from the currently set effect mode to another effect mode when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a predetermined effect mode are set. Sometimes, special effect control means for performing a special effect using two or more effect symbols, and a special effect for performing a special effect suggesting that the special game is highly expected after the special effect. And a non-special effect control means for performing a non-special effect that does not perform the special effect after the special effect, and the two or more effect symbols include at least the prior determination. A first special symbol that suggests that it may be determined that the special game is to be performed, and a second special symbol that suggests that the effect mode is shifted, and the special effect control means When the non-special effect is performed, among the first special symbol and the second special symbol, when the first special effect specifying the first special symbol is performed, and the second special symbol is When the second special effect to be specified is performed, the effect mode setting means shifts from the currently set effect mode to another effect mode after the second special effect is performed. It is characterized by that.

  According to the present invention, the interest of a player can be maintained and the interest of the game can be improved.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to a basic embodiment of the present invention. It is a schematic enlarged view of the information display part in the gaming machine of FIG. It is a back perspective view of the gaming machine of FIG. It is a block diagram of the part in connection with control of the gaming machine which concerns on basic embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the determination table per special figure in the main control part of a game machine. It is a figure which concerns on basic embodiment of this invention and shows the kind of jackpot. It is explanatory drawing of the special figure fluctuation pattern table in the main control part of a gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing of the special figure fluctuation pattern table for reference | standard modes. It is explanatory drawing of the big winning opening opening pattern table in the main control part of a game machine. It is explanatory drawing of some big winning opening opening patterns. It is explanatory drawing of the prior determination information storage area in the main control part of a gaming machine. It is a partial block diagram of a gaming machine including an internal block diagram of a production control unit. It is explanatory drawing of the special figure fluctuation effect pattern table in the effect control part of a gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing of the prior determination information storage area in the production control part of a gaming machine. It is the figure which listed some processes performed in the main control part of a gaming machine. It is the figure which listed a part of process performed in the production | presentation control part of a game machine. It is explanatory drawing of the production mode table in the production control part of a gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of presentation mode and a special figure fluctuation pattern table. It is explanatory drawing of the special figure fluctuation pattern table used for the fluctuation | variation of the 1st special symbol after the big hit game is complete | finished. It is explanatory drawing of the special figure fluctuation | variation pattern table used for the fluctuation | variation of the 2nd special symbol after the big hit game is complete | finished. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image display part in chance mode, branch production mode, probability change mode, reference | standard mode, and latent mode. It is explanatory drawing of the branch production performed after the big hit game is complete | finished. It is explanatory drawing of the 3 choice mode transition production effect as a component of a 3 choice branch production. It is explanatory drawing of the roulette effect utilized for 3 choice mode transition production effect. It is explanatory drawing of the 1st-3rd mode notification effect as a component of a 3 choice branch effect. It is a figure which shows the flow of the effect including a branch effect after the end of a jackpot game. It is explanatory drawing of four types of roulette displays which can be used in a roulette effect. It is explanatory drawing of the 4th and 5th mode notification effect selectively performed in 2 choice mode production effect (door opening production effect) as a component of 2 choice branch production, and 2 choice branch production. It is explanatory drawing of two types of door displays that can be used in the two-choice mode transition effect. It is explanatory drawing of the three-choice branch effect comprised using the combination of a some door opening rolling effect. It is explanatory drawing of the special figure fluctuation pattern table for chance modes. It is explanatory drawing of the special figure fluctuation pattern table for branch production modes. It is explanatory drawing of the special figure fluctuation pattern table for probability variation modes. It is explanatory drawing of the special figure fluctuation pattern table for latent modes. The flowchart which shows the content of the command reception process by the production | presentation control part of the gaming machine concerning 1st Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the content of the presentation mode control determination process by the presentation control part of the gaming machine concerning 1st Embodiment. Explanatory diagram of the contents stored in the effect counter storage area in the effect control unit of the gaming machine The 1st explanatory view of the special mode fluctuation pattern table for standard modes in the main control part of the gaming machine concerning a 1st embodiment. 2nd explanatory drawing of the special mode fluctuation pattern table for reference modes in the main control part of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment. Explanatory drawing of the table for 1st reference | standard mode execution determination in the presentation control part of the gaming machine concerning 1st Embodiment. Explanatory drawing of the reference | standard mode table in the presentation control part of the gaming machine concerning 1st Embodiment. Explanatory drawing of the 2nd reference | standard mode execution determination table in the presentation control part of the gaming machine concerning 1st Embodiment. Explanatory drawing of the 1st standard mode-the 3rd standard mode which paid its attention to the basic background image and the mode of a decoration design in the production control part of the gaming machine concerning a 1st embodiment. First example of a timing chart showing the relationship between the fluctuation display of the special figure fluctuation and the setting of the first and second reference mode flags Second example of a timing chart showing the relationship between the fluctuation display of special figure fluctuation and the setting of the first and second reference mode flags Third example of a timing chart showing the relationship between the fluctuation display of the special figure fluctuation and the first and second reference mode flag settings The flowchart which shows the content of the production content prior determination process by the production control part of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment. The flowchart which shows the content of the production content prior determination process by the production control part of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment. Explanatory drawing of the special figure fluctuation pattern table in the main control part of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment. Explanatory drawing of the basic effect content determination table in the effect control part of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment. Explanatory drawing which shows an example of the reservation image and rights image in the production | presentation control part of the gaming machine concerning 1st Embodiment. Explanatory drawing of the pending | holding effect content determination table in the effect control part of the gaming machine concerning 1st Embodiment. 1st explanatory drawing which shows the example of a holding | maintenance effect in the effect control part of the gaming machine concerning 1st Embodiment. 2nd explanatory drawing which shows the holding | maintenance effect example in the effect control part of the gaming machine concerning 1st Embodiment. 3rd explanatory drawing which shows the holding | maintenance effect example in the effect control part of the gaming machine concerning 1st Embodiment. 4th explanatory drawing which shows the example of a holding | maintenance effect in the effect control part of the gaming machine concerning 1st Embodiment. Explanatory drawing which shows the example of the effect performed in the effect control part of the game machine concerning 1st Embodiment, and the special symbol matched with it. 1st explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the gaming machine concerning 1st Embodiment. 2nd explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the gaming machine concerning 1st Embodiment. Explanatory drawing of the table for execution effect suggestion effect execution determination in the effect control part of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment. 3rd explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the gaming machine concerning 1st Embodiment. 4th explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the gaming machine concerning 1st Embodiment. 5th explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the gaming machine concerning 1st Embodiment. 6th explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the gaming machine concerning 1st Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the content of the execution effect suggestion effect determination process by the effect control part of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment. 7th explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the gaming machine concerning 1st Embodiment. 8th explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the gaming machine concerning 1st Embodiment. 9th explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the gaming machine concerning 1st Embodiment. 1st explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the game machine concerning 2nd Embodiment. 2nd explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the gaming machine concerning 2nd Embodiment. 3rd explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the gaming machine concerning 2nd Embodiment. 4th explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the gaming machine concerning 2nd Embodiment. 5th explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the gaming machine concerning 2nd Embodiment. 6th explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the gaming machine concerning 2nd Embodiment. 1st explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the game machine concerning 3rd Embodiment. 2nd explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the gaming machine concerning 3rd Embodiment. 3rd explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the game machine concerning 3rd Embodiment. 4th explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the game machine concerning 3rd Embodiment. 5th explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the game machine concerning 3rd Embodiment. 6th explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the game machine concerning 3rd Embodiment. 7th explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the game machine concerning 3rd Embodiment. 8th explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the game machine concerning 3rd Embodiment. 1st explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the game machine concerning 4th Embodiment. 2nd explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the game machine concerning 4th Embodiment. 3rd explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the game machine concerning 4th Embodiment. 4th explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the game machine concerning 4th Embodiment. 5th explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the game machine concerning 4th Embodiment. 6th explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the game machine concerning 4th Embodiment. 1st explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the game machine concerning 5th Embodiment. 2nd explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the gaming machine concerning 5th Embodiment. 3rd explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the game machine concerning 5th Embodiment. 4th explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the game machine concerning 5th Embodiment. 5th explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the game machine concerning 5th Embodiment. 6th explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the game machine concerning 5th Embodiment. 7th explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the game machine concerning 5th Embodiment. 8th explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the gaming machine concerning 5th Embodiment. 1st explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the gaming machine concerning 6th Embodiment. 2nd explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the gaming machine concerning 6th Embodiment. 3rd explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the gaming machine concerning 6th Embodiment. 4th explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the gaming machine concerning 6th Embodiment. 5th explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the gaming machine concerning 6th Embodiment. 6th explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the game machine concerning 6th Embodiment. 7th explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the gaming machine concerning 6th Embodiment. 8th explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the execution effect suggestion effect in the effect control part of the gaming machine concerning 6th Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, an example of an embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In each of the drawings to be referred to, the same part is denoted by the same reference numeral, and redundant description regarding the same part is omitted in principle. In this specification, for simplification of description, the names of information, signals, physical quantities, members, etc. corresponding to the symbols or signs are indicated by writing symbols or signs referring to information, signals, physical quantities, members, etc. Omitted or abbreviated. For example, when the code 105 is assigned to the “first start port”, the “first start port” may be expressed as “first start port 105” or simply “start port 105”. Sometimes.

/// Basic embodiment ///
An embodiment suitable for a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in detail. A plurality of embodiments will be described later. First, a basic embodiment will be described as an embodiment serving as a basis for the plurality of embodiments. In the basic embodiment, the gaming machine according to the present invention is applied to a gaming machine (so-called digipachi) belonging to the former first type.

<< Basic configuration of gaming machine >>
FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 100 according to the basic embodiment. A basic configuration of the gaming machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. The gaming machine 100 is a pachinko gaming machine, and includes each component shown in FIG. At a lower position of the game board 101, a launching unit for launching a game ball is disposed (the detailed structure of the launching unit is not shown). Note that the upper, lower, left, and right refer to the upper, lower, left, and right viewed from the player facing the game board 101 unless otherwise specified, and the vertical and horizontal directions are parallel to the board surface of the game board 101. The vertical direction is parallel to the vertical direction, and the horizontal direction is parallel to the horizontal direction.

  In the gaming machine 100, the game ball launched upward by the driving of the launching unit rises between the rails 102a and 102b and reaches the upper position of the game board 101, and then in the game area 103 formed in the game board 101. Falls (flows down). The game area 103 is provided with a plurality of nails (not shown), and the game balls fall in an unspecified direction by the nails. A glass plate (not shown) that covers the game area 103 so as to be visible in front of the game board 101 (player side) is fixed to the frame member 113. Further, in the game board 101, a game ball fall path in the game area 103 includes a windmill that changes the fall direction of the game ball, a first start port 105, a second start port 106, an electric tulip 107, a gate 108, a large A winning port 109 and a normal winning port 110 are installed.

  An image display unit 104 composed of a liquid crystal display panel or the like is disposed at a substantially central portion of the game board 101. The image display unit 104 displays various effect images. For example, the image display unit 104 displays a decorative symbol provided in correspondence with a special symbol for representing the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, and an image related to an effect that is performed until the gaming machine 100 indicates the lottery result of the jackpot lottery Is displayed. The image display unit 104 may also display a symbol (ordinary decoration symbol) for representing a lottery result of the normal symbol lottery.

  A first start port 105 and a second start port 106 are installed below the image display unit 104. The start openings 105 and 106 form a start area through which game balls can pass (winning is possible). When the predetermined first start condition or second start condition is satisfied, the right to receive the big hit lottery is acquired. The first and second start conditions are satisfied when the game ball passes through the start ports 105 and 106, that is, when the game ball wins (enters) the start ports 105 and 106, respectively. In addition, when the gaming machine 100 detects a winning game ball at the start port 105 or 106, the gaming machine 100 pays out a predetermined number (for example, three) of gaming balls. The game balls to be paid out are also called prize balls.

  An electric tulip 107 is provided in the vicinity of the second start port 106. The electric tulip 107 is in a closed state (a closed state) that makes it difficult to win the game ball to the second start port 106, and an open state (open state) that makes it easier to win the game ball in the second start port 106 than in the closed state. ) In either state. Switching between these states is performed by a solenoid provided in the electric tulip 107. In effect, when the electric tulip 107 is in the closed state, it is impossible to win the game ball into the second starting port 106, and only when the electric tulip 107 is in the open state, the second starting of the game ball is started. Winning to the mouth 106 becomes possible. The opening of the electric tulip 107 is also referred to as the opening of the electric tulip 107. The electric tulip 107 is opened based on the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery performed when the game ball passes through the gate 108 arranged on the right side of the image display unit 104. Similarly to the start ports 105 and 106, the gate 108 forms a start region through which a game ball can pass (winning is possible).

  A big prize opening 109 is provided on the right side of the second start opening 106. The grand prize opening 109 can also be opened and closed like the electric tulip 107, and a closed state (a closed state) that makes it difficult to win the game ball to the big prize opening 109, and a larger game ball than the closed state. One of the open states (opened state) that makes it easy to win the winning hole 109 is taken. Switching between these states is performed by a solenoid provided in the special winning opening 109. In effect, when the grand prize opening 109 is in the closed state, it is impossible to win the game ball into the big prize opening 109, and only when the big prize opening 109 is in the open state, the game ball is awarded a big prize. Winning to the mouth 109 is possible. The opening of the big prize opening 109 is also referred to as the opening of the big prize opening 109. The big winning opening 109 is normally closed, and when a big win is won in the big win lottery, a predetermined round (for example, 30 seconds elapses or a winning of 10 game balls) is satisfied is predetermined. Repeat as many times as possible (for example, 16 times). When the gaming machine 100 detects a game ball that has won a prize winning port 109, the gaming machine 100 pays out a predetermined number (for example, 15) of prize balls.

  One or more normal winning openings 110 are installed on the side or lower side of the image display unit 104. The gaming machine 100 pays out a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls when detecting a winning in the normal winning opening 110. The first start port 105, the second start port 106, the gate 108, the big winning port 109, and the normal winning port 110 are not limited to the positions shown in FIG. 1, and may be arranged at arbitrary positions in the game area 103. . At the bottom of the game area 103, there is provided a collection port 111 for collecting game balls that have not won any of the first start port 105, the second start port 106, the big winning port 109 and the normal winning port 110. Yes.

  An information display unit 112 is provided in the lower right portion of the game board 101. Details of the information display unit 112 will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, the installation position of the information display part 112 can be changed arbitrarily.

  A frame member 113 is provided on the outer peripheral portion of the game area 103 of the game board 101. The frame member 113 has a shape that surrounds the periphery of the game area 103 on four sides of the game board 101 on the top, bottom, left, and right sides and protrudes from the board surface of the game board 101 to the player side. The frame member 113 incorporates a speaker 114, an effect light unit 115, and the like. The effect light unit 115 includes a plurality of lamps and a plurality of motors, and the direction of light irradiation by the lamps can be changed up and down or left and right by driving the motors.

  An operation handle 116 is disposed at the lower right position of the frame member 113. The operation handle 116 has a shape that protrudes toward the player side, and a firing instruction member 117 is provided on the outer periphery thereof. The firing instruction member 117 is rotatably supported by the operation handle 116. When a player fires a game ball, the player rotates the firing instruction member 117 clockwise. At this time, the player can adjust the launch intensity of the game ball according to the angle at which the launch instruction member 117 is rotated. The operation handle 116 is provided with a sensor for detecting that the player directly operates the firing instruction member 117. Only when the sensor detects that the firing instruction member 117 is directly operated by the player, the gaming machine 100 fires a game ball.

  In the frame member 113, an effect button 118, a cross key 119, a hit ball supply tray 120, and the like are provided below the game area 103. The effect button 118 and the cross key 119 constitute an operation accepting unit for accepting an operation from the player. The hitting ball supply tray 120 has a shape that can accommodate a game ball, and sends out the stored game ball to the launching unit.

  On the game board 101, a movable accessory 130 that is driven at the time of production is provided. For example, when performing an effect using the movable accessory 130, the movable accessory 130 slides downward from the position shown in FIG. 1 and advances to the front surface of the image display unit 104. In this manner, the image display unit 104 is retracted to a storage space provided at the top.

<< Information display section >>
As shown in FIG. 2, the information display unit 112 includes a special symbol display unit 201 that displays a special symbol indicating the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, a normal symbol display unit 202 that displays a normal symbol that indicates the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery, A display unit 203, a round number display unit 204, and a right-handed display unit 205 are provided. Each display unit 201 to 205 can be formed by an LED (Light Emitting Diode) display.

  There are first and second special symbols as special symbols. The special symbol display unit 201 includes a first special symbol display unit 201a that displays a first special symbol and a second special symbol display unit 201b that displays a second special symbol. The hold display unit 203 includes display units 203a, 203b, and 203c. The right of lottery lottery (the information for special figure determination to be described later) due to the establishment of the first start condition is held up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) as the upper limit, and the number of the held rights is displayed on the display unit 203a as the number of held information U1. Is displayed. The right of lottery lottery (the special figure determination information described later) due to the establishment of the second start condition is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) as the upper limit, and the number of the reserved rights is displayed as the reserved information number U2 on the display unit 203b. Is displayed. The right of the normal symbol lottery due to the game ball passing through the gate 108 is held up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) as the upper limit, and the number of the held rights is displayed on the display unit 203c as the hold information number U3.

<< Back configuration of gaming machine >>
With reference to FIG. 3, the back side structure of the gaming machine 100 will be described. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the gaming machine 100 showing a rear configuration of the gaming machine 100. On the back surface of the gaming machine 100, a main control board 301, a prize ball control board 302, an effect control board 303, a power board 304 that supplies power to each board in the gaming machine 100, an output terminal board 305, and the like are provided. ing. Those boards (particularly the effect control board 303) may be formed of a plurality of printed boards. Further, a power plug 315 for supplying power to the power supply board 304 and a power switch (not shown) are also provided on the back surface of the gaming machine 100.

  The frame member 113 is connected to the outer frame 330 via a hinge mechanism portion 320 on one end side in the left-right direction (for example, the left side when viewed from the player), and the other end side in the left-right direction (using the hinge mechanism portion 320 as a fulcrum) For example, the right side as viewed from the player can be turned away from the outer frame 330. By rotating the frame member 113 like a door around the hinge mechanism 320 as a fulcrum, the inner part of the outer frame 330 including the game board 101 can be opened. A lock mechanism (not shown) that fixes the other end side to the outer frame 330 is provided on the other end side of the frame member 113 (for example, the right side when viewed from the player).

<< Basic operation of gaming machine >>
Next, the basic operation of the gaming machine 100 will be described. When the first or second start condition is established, the gaming machine 100 acquires special figure determination information according to the establishment timing, and performs a big hit lottery based on the special figure determination information. Acquisition of special figure determination information is equivalent to acquisition of the right of jackpot lottery. In the jackpot lottery, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won (whether the jackpot is won or the game is lost). When the jackpot lottery is performed based on the establishment of the first start condition, the gaming machine 100 variably displays the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 201a. Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating the lottery lottery result (that is, in a mode indicating the lottery lottery result). On the other hand, when the jackpot lottery is performed based on the establishment of the second start condition, the gaming machine 100 variably displays the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 201b. Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating the lottery lottery result (that is, in a manner indicating the lottery lottery result).

  When the gaming machine 100 displays the special symbol (first or second special symbol) in a variable manner, the gaming machine 100 displays the decorative symbol in a variable manner on the image display unit 104, and stops the decorative symbol in accordance with the stop display of the special symbol. Display. The decorative symbols displayed on the image display unit 104 include first to third decorative symbols, and each decorative symbol is associated with a numerical value or a symbol. For example, when a special symbol is stopped and displayed with a predetermined symbol indicating a jackpot (that is, when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery), a combination indicating a jackpot (for example, a so-called doublet such as “7, 7, 7”) To stop and display the first to third decorative symbols.

  The combination of the first to third decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed varies depending on the type of jackpot that has been won. For example, in the case of winning per normal length (see FIG. 6), which will be described later, each decorative symbol is displayed as a blue decorative symbol (for example, “3, 3, 3” and “7, 7, 7”). If you stop the display with a square symbol such as “2, 2, 2”, etc., excluding, and if you win per probability variation length (see Fig. 6) described later, each decorative symbol will be red indicating the probability variation length. Stop display with a decorative symbol (for example, a “3, 3, 3” or “7, 7, 7” numeral symbol). In the case of winning a winning short win, a winning short win (see FIG. 6) or a small win, which will be described later, each decorative symbol is a decorative symbol indicating a probable short winning, a latent short winning or a small winning (for example, “chance”) The character is displayed with a stop, and the character symbol indicating the mode transition is displayed. Even if the winning per winning variable length is won, a decorative symbol indicating the normal winning length is stopped on the image display unit 104, and after that (for example, before the jackpot game transition or after the jackpot game transition) There may be a promotion effect that clearly shows that it is a win.

  When the result of the jackpot lottery is lost (that is, when the jackpot lottery is lost, in other words, when the jackpot lottery is not won), the first to third decorative symbols, for example, stop at a so-called scatter that shows a loser. To do. The loose eye corresponds to stopping the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol with an unrelated symbol, and is a decorative pattern stop mode that does not develop into reach production.

  When the special symbol is stopped and displayed with the combination indicating the jackpot, the gaming machine 100 enters the jackpot gaming state. In the jackpot game state, a jackpot game is performed in which the jackpot 109 is opened for a round corresponding to the winning jackpot (for example, 16 rounds). When a game ball wins the big prize opening 109 while the big prize opening 109 is opened, the gaming machine 100 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls. During the jackpot game, the jackpot lottery is not performed. The jackpot gaming state ends when the winning prize opening 109 for the winning round is completed. In the jackpot game state, the game is played by right-handed. “Right hit” means that a game ball is launched into a game area on the right side of the center line that divides the game area 103 left and right in the game area 103. On the other hand, left-handed strike means that a game ball is launched into the game area on the left side of the center line in the game area 103. The jackpot game state is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (in other words, the jackpot game is more advantageous to the player than the game in the normal game state). The advantage in the jackpot game is that the player easily obtains more prize balls (the expected value of the prize balls is greater) with the opening of the big prize opening 109 than in the game in the normal game state. means.

  After the jackpot game ends, the gaming machine 100 returns to a state in which the jackpot lottery is performed. At this time, the gaming state may be changed according to the type of winning jackpot.

<< Game state of gaming machine >>
The gaming machine 100 is a low-probability non-electric support game state, a low-probability electric support game state, and a probabilistic game state, except for a game state (including a jackpot game state) that involves the opening of the big winning opening 109. Any one of a high probability electric support game state and a high probability non-electric support game state to be said is taken. The electric support is an abbreviation for an electric chew support function, and details will be described later.

  The normal gaming state (low probability non-electric support game state) and the low probability electric support game state belong to the low probability game state. In the low-probability gaming state, the gaming machine 100 performs a jackpot lottery using a determination table per low-probability special chart (see table TAt1 in FIG. 5 described later), and in the basic embodiment, for example, a jackpot with a probability of 1/399 A lottery lottery will be held.

  The high probability electric support game state and the high probability non-electric support game state belong to the high probability game state. In the high-probability gaming state, the gaming machine 100 performs a jackpot lottery using a determination table per high-probability special chart (see table TAt2 in FIG. 5 described later), and here, as an example, the jackpot is won with a probability of 10/399 A lottery lottery will be held. That is, in the high probability gaming state, the jackpot is won with a 10 times higher probability than in the low probability gaming state. Therefore, the high probability gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the low probability gaming state for the jackpot winning.

  The low probability electric support game state and the high probability electric support game state belong to the electric support game state. In the electric support game state, the gaming machine 100 provides a game support function (hereinafter referred to as “electric support”) that involves opening and closing the electric tulip 107 (that is, the electric support is activated). The specific contents of the electric support will not be described in detail because it is a publicly known technology. For example, when the electric support is given, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened compared to when the electric support is not provided, An increase in the winning probability of the lottery (thus, an increase in the opening frequency of the electric tulip 107) and an increase in the opening time of the electric tulip 107 are achieved. In the electric support game state, as the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery increases, it becomes easier for the game ball to win the second starting port 106 than in the non-electric support game state where no electric support is given. In the electric support game state, a game is played by the above-mentioned right strike, and the opportunity for the big hit lottery is mainly winning the second start opening 106.

  The normal gaming state (low probability non-electric support game state) and the high probability non-electric support game state belong to a non-electric support game state to which no electric support is given. In the non-electric support game state, the game is played by left-handed as described above, and the big win lottery is mainly a winning to the first start opening 105. As understood from the above description, the electric support game state is a game state in which the start condition (second start condition) is more easily established than the non-electric support game state. Therefore, the electric support game state is more advantageous to the player than the non-electric support game state with respect to the ease of establishment of the start condition.

<< Internal structure of gaming machine >>
The internal configuration of the gaming machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of a part related to control in the gaming machine 100. As shown in FIG. 4, the control unit 400 provided in the gaming machine 100 includes a main control unit 401 that controls the progress of the game, a prize ball control unit 402 that controls the payout of prize balls, and an effect that controls the contents of the effect. And a control unit 403. In addition to the control unit 400, each component shown in FIG. 4 is provided in the gaming machine 100. For example, the main control board 301, prize ball control board 302, and effect control board 303 in FIG. 3 form the main control section 401, prize ball control section 402, and effect control section 403 in FIG. The terminal board 305 includes the board external information terminal board 491 of FIG.

[1. Main control unit]
The main control unit 401 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 411, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 412, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 413, an input / output interface (I / O) (not shown), and the like. The The CPU 411 reads various programs related to the progress of the game from the ROM 412 and executes the read programs using the RAM 413 as a work area.

  The main controller 401 is connected to various switches (hereinafter abbreviated as “SW”) for detecting a game ball. For example, as shown in the figure, the main control unit 401 has a first start port SW 414 a that detects a game ball won in the first start port 105 and a second start that detects a game ball won in the second start port 106. A mouth SW 414b, a gate SW 415 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 108, a big winning port SW 416 that detects a game ball that has won a prize winning port 109, and a normal winning that detects a game ball that has won a normal winning hole 110. The mouth SW 417 is connected.

  Each of the SWs 414a and 414b and the SWs 415 to 417 outputs a detection signal indicating whether or not a game ball has been detected to the main control unit 401, and the main control unit 401 receives a jackpot lottery based on the input detection signal. For example, special figure determination information corresponding to the right for this purpose is stored, a lottery lottery is performed using the special figure determination information, and a prize ball payout instruction is given to the prize ball control unit 402.

  As the SWs 414a, 414b, 415, 416 and 417, proximity switches or the like can be employed. Further, when a plurality of first start ports 105 are provided on the game board 101, a first start port SW 414 a is provided for each of the plurality of first start ports 105. The same applies to the case where a plurality of the second start opening 106, the gate 108, the big winning opening 109 or the normal winning opening 110 are provided.

  The main control unit 401 is connected to various solenoids that drive the electric combination on the game board 101. For example, as shown in the figure, the main controller 401 is connected to an electric tulip solenoid 418 that opens and closes the electric tulip 107 and a big prize opening solenoid 419 that opens and closes the big prize opening 109.

  The main control unit 401 inputs or does not input an electric signal to the electric tulip solenoid 418 based on the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery, and inputs or does not input an electric signal to the big prize opening solenoid 419 based on the lottery result of the big hit lottery And The solenoids 418 and 419 perform the opening / closing operation of the electric tulip 107 and the opening / closing operation of the special prize opening 109 by converting the electric signal supplied from the main control unit 401 into a mechanical motion, respectively.

  Further, various display units in the information display unit 112 in FIG. 2 are connected to the main control unit 401. In FIG. 4, a state in which the first special symbol display unit 201a, the second special symbol display unit 201b, the normal symbol display unit 202, and the hold display unit 203 are connected to the main control unit 401 is illustrated, thereby preventing the complication of the drawing. Therefore, illustration of the round number display unit 204 and the right-handed display unit 205 is omitted.

  The main control unit 401 performs display control of the first special symbol display unit 201a or the second special symbol display unit 201b based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, and the display control of the normal symbol display unit 202 based on the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery. I do. Furthermore, the main control unit 401 controls the display content of the hold display unit 203 based on the number of hold information U1, U2, and U3.

  Here, various processes realized by the CPU 411 of the main control unit 401 executing a program in the ROM 412 and examples of information set (that is, stored) in the RAM 413 will be described. Note that the processes, programs, tables, and storage areas described below with respect to the main control unit 401 are only a part of the processes performed by the CPU 411, the programs and tables in the ROM 412, and the storage areas in the RAM 413, and various other types. Various processes, programs, tables, and storage areas are executed by the CPU 411 or prepared in the ROM 412 or the RAM 413. As shown in FIG. 4, the ROM 412 stores tables TAt, TZt, THt, FAt, FZt, FHt, and DKt, and the RAM 413 has storage areas 413a to 413j.

  The CPU 411 executes main processing by a main processing program in the ROM 412 (see FIG. 15). When power is supplied to the gaming machine 100, the main process is executed. In the main process, the CPU 411 performs initial setting of built-in devices such as a CTC (timer counter) of the main control unit 401, and stores setting information indicating setting contents in the setting storage area 413a. For example, the setting information includes information indicating a cycle for executing a timer interrupt process to be described later.

  In the main process, whether or not the gaming machine 100 is turned off is monitored. When the power is turned off, backup information is generated and the backup information is stored in the backup storage area 413b. The RAM 413 is supplied with power by a backup power source (not shown) even if the gaming machine 100 is powered off for a certain period (for example, one day). For this reason, the RAM 413 can hold the backup information stored in the backup storage area 413b for a certain period even when the power of the gaming machine 100 is shut off. Note that a nonvolatile RAM such as a FeRAM (Ferroelectric Random Access Memory) or a nonvolatile memory such as a flash memory may be adopted as the RAM 413. In this case, the RAM 413 can hold the backup information stored in the backup storage area 413b without a backup power source.

  The CPU 411 executes timer interrupt processing by the timer interrupt processing program in the ROM 412 (see FIG. 15). In the timer interrupt process, a random number update process, a switch process, a special symbol process, a normal symbol process, an electric accessory control process, a prize ball process, and an output process are sequentially executed. The timer interrupt process is interrupted with respect to the main process at the cycle stored in the setting storage area 413a by the main process.

  The CPU 411 executes random number update processing by a random number update processing program in the ROM 412 (see FIG. 15). In the random number update process, the CPU 411 updates the count value of each random number counter by adding “1” to the count value of each random number counter stored in the counter storage area 413c. The counter storage area 413c includes a main control unit 401 that includes a random number counter C1 per special figure, a special figure random number counter C2, a special figure variation pattern random number counter C3, a random number counter C4 per common figure, and a general figure random number counter C5. The count values of various random number counters to be managed are stored. The counters C1 to C5 respectively count a random number per special figure, a special figure random number, a special fluctuation pattern random number, a random number per common figure, and a common figure random number.

  In the random number update process, the CPU 411 returns the count value of the counter to “0” when the count value of any one of the random number counters C1 to C5 exceeds a predetermined upper limit value, and then the same Count up. In the basic embodiment, as an example, a random number per special figure, a special figure random number, and a special figure variation pattern random number are counted within a range of “0 to 398”, “0 to 99”, and “0 to 499”, respectively. Shall. The random numbers per common figure and the random numbers of common symbols are counted within a range of “0 to 9”, for example. Note that any random number in the basic embodiment takes only an integer value unless otherwise specified.

  The CPU 411 executes switch processing by a switch processing program in the ROM 412 (see FIG. 15). In the switch process, a start opening switch process, a gate switch process, a big winning opening switch process, and a normal winning opening switch process are sequentially executed.

  The CPU 411 executes the start port switch process according to the start port switch processing program in the ROM 412 (see FIG. 15). The start port switch process includes first and second start port switch processes. In the first start port switch process, the CPU 411 detects when the first start port SW 414a detects a game ball that has won the first start port 105 (that is, the timing at which the first start condition is established based on the winning at the start port 105). ), The count values of the counters C1 to C3 in the counter storage area 413c are acquired, and the acquired count values of the counters C1 to C3 are included as random numbers per special figure, special figure random numbers, and special figure variation pattern random numbers. Information for determination (special figure holding information) is stored in the special figure determination information storage area 413 d of the RAM 413. In the second start port switch process, the CPU 411 detects the timing at which a game ball winning the second start port 106 is detected by the second start port SW 414b (ie, the timing at which the second start condition is established based on the winning at the start port 106). ), The count values of the counters C1 to C3 in the counter storage area 413c are acquired, and the special figure determination including the acquired count values of the counters C1 to C3 as a random number per special figure, a special figure random number, and a special figure variation pattern random number Information (special drawing hold information) is stored in the special figure determination information storage area 413d of the RAM 413.

  The special figure determination information storage area 413d stores special figure determination information based on establishment of the first start condition and special figure determination information based on establishment of the second start condition, with a predetermined number as an upper limit. it can. Here, it is assumed that the predetermined number is four. Therefore, up to eight pieces of special figure determination information can be stored in the storage area 413d. The number of special figure determination information triggered by the establishment of the first and second start conditions in the storage area 413d corresponds to the above-described numbers of hold information U1 and U2, respectively. In addition, a priority order for receiving the big hit lottery is set for each special figure determination information stored in the storage area 413d. Basically, a higher priority is set for the special figure determination information acquired earlier in time. However, it is assumed that a higher priority is set for the special figure determination information acquired when the second start condition is satisfied as compared to the special figure determination information acquired when the first start condition is satisfied.

  The CPU 411 executes gate switch processing according to the gate switch processing program in the ROM 412 (see FIG. 15). In the gate switch process, the CPU 411 acquires the count values of the counters C4 and C5 in the counter storage area 413c at the timing when the game ball that has passed through the gate 108 is detected by the gate SW415, and the acquired count values of the counters C4 and C5. Is stored in the general-purpose information storage area 413i of the RAM 413, for example.

  The common figure determination information storage area 413i can store common figure determination information with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Here, it is assumed that the predetermined number is four. The number of general-purpose determination information in the storage area 413i corresponds to the above-described reserved information number U3. Priorities for receiving the normal symbol lottery are set for each of the information for determining ordinary symbols stored in the storage area storage area 413i. A higher priority is set for the information for determining ordinary drawings acquired earlier in time.

  The CPU 411 executes a special winning opening switch process according to the special winning opening switch processing program in the ROM 412 (see FIG. 15). In the big prize opening switch process, the CPU 411 detects a game ball won in the big prize opening 109 by the big prize opening SW416.

  The CPU 411 executes the normal winning opening switch processing by the ordinary winning opening switch processing program in the ROM 412 (see FIG. 15). In the normal winning opening switch process, the CPU 411 detects a game ball won in the normal winning opening 110 by the normal winning opening SW 417.

  The CPU 411 executes special symbol processing by a special symbol processing program in the ROM 412 (see FIG. 15). In the special symbol processing, the CPU 411 sequentially executes determination per special symbol, special symbol determination, and special symbol variation pattern determination using the special symbol determination information stored in the special symbol determination information storage area 413d. These determination results are stored in the special figure determination result storage area 413e. Based on these determination results, the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display unit 201 is displayed in a variable manner and stopped. The jackpot lottery may include special symbol determination and special symbol determination (see FIG. 15), and may further include special symbol variation pattern determination. When the CPU 411 starts the variation display of the special symbol, when the CPU 411 sets a variation start command including the determination result of the special symbol determination, the special symbol determination, and the special symbol variation pattern determination in the RAM 413, and stops the variation of the special symbol. The change stop command is set in the RAM 413. In addition, when the result of the special figure hit determination shows that the big win or the small win is won, the CPU 411 sets the opening command in the RAM 413 following the change stop command, thereby executing the hit effect on the effect control unit 403. Instruct. These commands are output to the effect control unit 403 in an output process (see FIG. 15) described later.

  In the special symbol processing, the CPU 411 acquires the special figure determination information set with the highest priority in the special figure determination information storage area 413d as the determination target (the determination target) TT, and the special pattern of the determination target TT. By using the information for determination, determination per special figure, special symbol design determination, and special graphic fluctuation pattern determination are sequentially executed. The special figure determination information that is the determination target TT is erased from the storage area 413d and transferred to another storage area (not shown).

――― Judgment table per special figure; Fig.5――

  In the special symbol process, the CPU 411 first performs a per-special symbol determination that involves a comparison between the special symbol determination table TAt stored in the ROM 412 and a random number per special symbol of the determination target TT.

  FIG. 5 shows an example of the special figure determination table TAt. As shown in FIG. 5, the determination table TAt per special figure includes a determination table TAt1 per low probability special figure and a determination table TAt2 per high probability special figure. Each of the tables TAt1 and TAt2 has a predetermined determination value associated with the jackpot.

  When the high probability game flag is set to OFF at the time of determination per special figure (that is, at the time of big hit lottery), the CPU 411 performs determination per special figure using the table TAt1, and sets the high probability game flag to ON. If it has been determined, the table TAt2 is used to determine per special figure. Then, the CPU 411 determines that the jackpot has been won if the random number per special figure of the determination target TT matches the determination value associated with the jackpot, and if not, it is a loss (that is, the jackpot is won). Not). The gaming state of the gaming machine 100 is a high probability gaming state when the high probability gaming flag is ON, and a low probability gaming state when the high probability gaming flag is OFF.

  The random number per special figure takes any integer value within the numerical value range “0 to 398”. In the table TAt1, only the determination value “0” is assigned to the jackpot. On the other hand, in the table TAt2, for each jackpot, a total of 10 integer values in “0-9” are assigned to the determination values. For this reason, when the determination per special figure is performed using the table TAt1, the winning probability of winning the jackpot (winning probability of winning the jackpot lottery) is 1/399, while the determination per special figure is performed using the table TAt2. In this case, the jackpot winning probability (winning lottery winning probability) is 10/399.

  In addition, the CPU 411 determines whether or not to win a small hit in the special figure determination. The small hit is not a big hit, but a specific lose represented by a special symbol different from a normal lose (a loss other than the small hit). The CPU 411 determines that the winning unit is won when the random number per special figure of the determination target TT matches the determination value associated with the small unit. In both the tables TAt1 and TAt2, only the determination value of “50” is assigned to the small hit. Therefore, regardless of ON / OFF of the high-probability game flag, the winning probability per unit is 1/399. However, in the determination per special figure for the second special symbol (in the determination per special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition), no win is won regardless of the random number per special figure.

――― Type of jackpot; Figure 6 ―――
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing types of jackpots. As jackpots, there are special A to special G and general A to general C. Special A to Special D and Special G belong to the probability variation length, Special E belongs to the probability variation short length, and Feature F belongs to the latent probability short length. A to C are usually per unit length. The special G belongs to a jump-up bonus (JUB) which is a kind per probability variation length. Special A to Special C and Special A to General C each have 4 rounds, Special D and Special G each have 16 rounds, Special E and Special F each have 2 rounds Round. Note that “R” in the jackpot indicates a round. In each round, the big prize opening 109 is opened until the opening time of the big prize opening 109 reaches a predetermined time or until the number of winning game balls to the big prize opening 109 reaches a predetermined number.

The opening time (for example, 30 seconds) of the large winning opening 109 for each round per probability variation length and per normal length is the opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds) of the large winning opening 109 for each round per probability variation short and latent short. ) Longer than.
The opening time of the big winning opening 109 in each round is the same between the probability variation length and the normal length, but may be slightly different between the probability variation length and the normal length.
The opening time of the big winning opening 109 in each round is the same between the probability variation per short and the latent probability short per, but may be slightly different between the probability variation per short and the latency short per.
The opening mode of the first round big prize opening 109 in the special G is different from that of the special A or the like, but details will be described later.

  In the judgment per special figure for the first special symbol (in the judgment per special figure based on the establishment of the first starting condition), when the jackpot is won, the jackpot is special A, special B, special C, special D, special The ratios of E, Special F, Special G, A, B, and C are 5%, 5%, 5%, 30%, 15%, 15%, 7%, 7%, 6%, 5%. In the judgment per special figure for the second special symbol (in the judgment per special figure based on the establishment of the second starting condition), when the jackpot is won, the jackpot is special A, special B, special C, special D, general The ratios of A, B, and C are 5%, 5%, 5%, 67%, 7%, 6%, and 5%, respectively. In other words, in the special symbol processing for the second special symbol (in the special symbol processing based on the establishment of the second start condition), the special E to special G jackpot is not won.

  As can be seen from the above numerical examples, the ratio at which the jackpot is special A is the same between the special symbol determination for the first special symbol and the special symbol determination for the second special symbol. (The same applies to the ratio where the jackpot is Special B, Special C, A, B, or C). Moreover, in the judgment per special figure for the first or second special symbol, the ratio of the jackpot to A (7%) is higher than the ratio of the jackpot to B (6%), and the jackpot to B The ratio (6%) is higher than the ratio (5%) where the jackpot is C.

  After the jackpot game of special A to special E and special G is completed, the CPU 411 sets the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 to the high probability electric support game state, and until the next big jackpot is won, the setting contents (high probability electric game) Maintain support game). Actually, for example, after the special jackpot game of special A to special E and special G is finished, the high probability electric support game state is maintained until the special symbol fluctuates 10,000 times unless the next jackpot is generated. The probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability electric support game state is “10/399”. Therefore, after the end of the special A to special E and special G jackpot games, the probability of winning the next big jackpot It can be said that the sapo game state is maintained.

  After the special F jackpot game ends, the CPU 411 sets the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 to the high probability non-electric support game state, and the setting contents (high probability non-electric support game state) until the next jackpot is won. To maintain. Actually, for example, after the special F jackpot game is over, unless the next jackpot is generated, the high probability non-electric support game state is maintained until the special symbol fluctuates 10,000 times. The probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability non-electric support game state is “10/399”. Therefore, after the special F jackpot game is over, the high-probability non-electric support game state is practically until the next jackpot win. It can be said that it is maintained.

  After the end of the jackpot game of A, B or C, the CPU 411 sets the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 to the low probability electric support game state until the special symbol fluctuates by a predetermined number of times of electric support grant, After the special symbol fluctuates by a predetermined number of times of providing electric support, the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 is set to the low probability non-electric support state (that is, the normal gaming state). However, if the next jackpot is won after the completion of the jackpot game of A, B or C, the game state after the end of the next jackpot game will be set according to the type of jackpot won next time Is done. For example, if the special A jackpot is won at the first change of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game of the communication A, the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 is the high probability electric support game after the end of the jackpot game of the special A. Set to state.

  The number of times when the electric support is given refers to the number of times the special symbol is maintained to maintain the electric support game state. That is, for a certain jackpot, after the jackpot game is over, while the special symbol fluctuates i times, the gaming state is set to the electric support game state, and after the special symbol fluctuates i times, the non-electric support game state. When this is done, the number of times of providing electric support corresponding to the jackpot is i (i is an integer). The number of times of providing electric support for communication A, communication B, and communication C is 10, 20, and 30 times, respectively. The number of times electric support is given to special A to special E and special G is 10,000 times sufficiently larger than them. Since the start condition is easily established in the electric support game state, the more the electric support is given, the more advantageous for the player.

  In addition, even when winning a small win, a game (opening described later, a small winning game) is executed, but the main control unit 401 uses the winning of the small winning as an opportunity to play the game of the gaming machine 100 The state (the winning probability of the big hit lottery and whether or not the electric support is given) is not changed. That is, the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 (the winning probability of the big win lottery and the presence / absence of electric support) does not change between before and after the small win.

  If it is determined that the jackpot is won in the special symbol determination, the CPU 411 compares the special symbol determination table TZt stored in the ROM 412 with the special symbol random number of the determination target TT, and determines the jackpot based on the comparison result. A special symbol design to judge the type is performed.

  The special symbol symbol determination table TZt is composed of a first special symbol symbol determination table and a second special symbol symbol determination table. When the determination target TT is special figure determination information acquired when the first start condition is satisfied, the determination target TT is triggered when the second start condition is satisfied using the first special symbol determination table. In the case of the acquired special symbol determination information, the special symbol determination is performed using the second special symbol determination table. The first and second special symbol determination tables are created so that the types of jackpots for the first and second special symbols are determined by the above-described ratio (see FIG. 6).

  As can be seen from FIG. 6, the special symbol determination based on the establishment of the second start condition is relatively more advantageous for the player than the special symbol determination based on the establishment of the first start condition (that is, more Easy to get many prize balls). The relative advantage here is that the expected value of the number of winning balls (the expected value of the number of rounds) obtained by winning the winning prize opening 109 in the jackpot game executed based on the establishment of the second starting condition is This means that in the jackpot game executed based on the establishment of the start condition, it is larger than the expected value of the number of winning balls (expected value of the number of rounds) obtained by winning the winning prize port 109.

――― Special figure variation pattern table; Fig.7――
In the special symbol process, the CPU 411 compares the special figure fluctuation pattern table THt with the special figure fluctuation pattern random number of the determination target TT, and performs special figure fluctuation pattern determination for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern based on the comparison result. The determination of the special figure fluctuation pattern is synonymous with the selection or setting of the special figure fluctuation pattern.

  FIG. 7 shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern table THt. The special figure fluctuation pattern table THt includes a chance mode special figure fluctuation pattern table THt_a, a branching effect mode special figure fluctuation pattern table THt_b, a probability variation mode special figure fluctuation pattern table THt_c, a reference mode special figure fluctuation pattern table THt_d, and Are formed from a plurality of special figure fluctuation pattern tables including a latent figure special figure fluctuation pattern table THt_e.

  Each of the tables THt_a to THt_e stores a plurality of special figure fluctuation patterns that define the special symbol fluctuation modes. In the special figure variation pattern determination, the CPU 411 selects one of the tables THt_a to THt_e based on the current gaming state, various flags, and the like, and from among a plurality of special figure variation patterns included in the selected table. One special figure fluctuation pattern is selected based on the special figure fluctuation pattern random number of the determination target TT.

  The description of the tables THt_a, THt_b, THt_c, and THt_e will be provided later. Here, an example of the reference mode special figure variation pattern table THt_d will be described. In the normal gaming state, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination is mainly performed using the reference mode special figure fluctuation pattern table THt_d.

  FIG. 8 shows an example of the reference mode special figure variation pattern table THt_d. The special mode fluctuation pattern table THt_d for reference mode includes a special figure fluctuation pattern table THt_d1 for loss and a special figure fluctuation pattern table THt_d2 for jackpot.

  Each of the tables THt_d1 and THt_d2 is a table in which predetermined determination values are associated with all or a part of the special figure variation patterns THp_d11 to THp_d16. Each special figure fluctuation pattern including the special figure fluctuation patterns THp_d11 to THp_d16 defines the variation mode of the special symbol. For example, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is defined as the time for changing the special symbol (the length of time during which the special symbol fluctuation display is performed). (Hereinafter referred to as “variation time”). The special figure fluctuation pattern THp_d11 is a special figure fluctuation pattern in which a normal loss effect is performed, and the special figure fluctuation patterns THp_d12 to THp_d16 are special figure fluctuation patterns in which a reach effect is performed (see FIG. 13). The special symbol fluctuation times in the special figure fluctuation patterns THp_d11 to THp_d16 are 13.5 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, 60 seconds, 70 seconds, and 90 seconds, respectively.

  In the special figure variation pattern determination using the table THt_d, the CPU 411 selects the table THt_d1 when the determination result of the special figure determination is lost, while the table THt_d2 when the determination result of the special figure determination is the big hit. Select. Then, the CPU 411 corresponds to the determination target TT when the special figure fluctuation pattern random number of the determination target TT matches the determination value associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern THp_di in the selection table (here, THt_d1 or THt_d2). The special figure fluctuation pattern THp_di is selected and set as the special figure fluctuation pattern to be performed (where i is an integer of 11 to 16, inclusive).

  In the table THt_d1, a total of 475 judgment values “0 to 474” and a total of 16 judgment values “475 to 490” and a total of five for the special figure variation patterns THp_d11, THp_d12, THp_d13, THp_d14, and THp_d15, respectively. Determination values “491 to 495”, a total of three determination values “496 to 498”, and one determination value “499” are assigned (each determination value is an integer). In the table THt_d2, for the special figure variation patterns THp_d12, THp_d13, THp_d14, THp_d15, THp_d16, a total of 25 judgment values “0-24”, a total of 50 judgment values “25-74”, a total of 125 Determination values “75 to 199”, a total of 290 determination values “200 to 489”, and a total of 10 determination values “490 to 499” are assigned (each determination value is an integer).

  In the table THt_d1, no determination value is assigned to the special figure variation pattern THp_d16. In other words, in the table THt_d1, the special figure fluctuation pattern THp_d16 in which the premier reach effect (the jackpot determination effect; see FIG. 13) is not selected. In the table THt_d2, no determination value is assigned to the special figure variation pattern THp_d11. That is, in the table THt_d2, the special figure fluctuation pattern THp_d11 in which the normal loss effect (see FIG. 13) is performed is not selected. In a gaming state in which the reference mode special figure fluctuation pattern table THt_d is used, a special figure fluctuation pattern having a longer fluctuation time is more likely to be selected at the time of a big hit and difficult to be selected at the time of a loss. That is, the determination value in the table THt_d is determined so that the reliability for the big hit becomes higher as the special figure fluctuation pattern having a longer fluctuation time.

  Although not shown in FIG. 8, when the number of pending information (U1 or U2) is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (eg, 3), the determination result of the determination target TT per special figure is lost and the determination target TT When the random number of the special figure fluctuation pattern is any of “0 to 474”, a special figure fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time shorter than 13.5 seconds (for example, 2 seconds) corresponding to the determination target TT. You may make it select and set as a pattern.

  In the special figure determination result storage area 413e (see FIG. 4), the determination results of the special object per TT, the special symbol design determination, and the special figure variation pattern determination for the determination target TT are stored in a state of being associated with each other. The

  The CPU 411 executes normal symbol processing by the normal symbol processing program in the ROM 412 (see FIG. 15). In the normal symbol processing, the CPU 411 sequentially executes the universal symbol determination, the universal symbol determination, and the normal symbol variation pattern determination using the common symbol determination information stored in the general symbol determination information storage area 413i. These determination results are stored in the common figure determination result storage area 413j. Based on these determination results, the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display unit 202 is displayed in a variable manner and stopped. It may be considered that the normal symbol lottery includes general symbol per unit determination and general symbol determination (see FIG. 15), and further includes general symbol variation pattern determination.

  In the normal symbol processing, the CPU 411 obtains the information for determining the common figure having the highest priority in the general-purpose information storage area 413i as the general-purpose determination target FF, and determines the general-purpose determination of the general-purpose determination target FF. The universal symbol determination, the universal symbol determination, and the universal pattern variation pattern determination are sequentially executed using the business information. The information for determining the normal map that has become the target FF for normal map determination is erased from the storage area 413i and transferred to another storage area (not shown).

  In the per-standard determination, the CPU 411 determines that the per-standard random number of the general-purpose determination target FF is the determination value defined in the per-standard determination table FAt and the per-standard map as in the per-specific map determination. It is determined whether or not it matches the associated determination value. Then, the CPU 411 determines that the winning figure is won per universal figure if the random number per ordinary figure of the ordinary figure determination target FF matches the determination value associated with the ordinary figure, otherwise it is lost per universal figure. Is determined. There are two types of per map: per long open and short open. The time for the electric tulip 107 to be in the open state is longer per long opening than per short opening. For this reason, the standard symbol determination table FZt defines a determination value associated with each long opening and a determination value associated with each short opening. In the case of winning the symbol, the CPU 411 compares the symbol number of the target symbol FF with the criterion value in the table FZt in the symbol determination, and the symbol symbol number of the symbol FF is long. If it matches with the judgment value associated with the opening, it is determined that the winning is made for the long opening, while the common symbol random number of the normal figure determination target FF is associated with the short opening and If they match, it is determined that the short win is won.

  In the normal pattern variation pattern determination, the CPU 411 selects a general map variation pattern for the general map determination target FF from among a plurality of normal map variation patterns included in the general diagram variation pattern table FHt based on whether or not the electric support is provided. . The regular pattern variation pattern defines the variation time of a normal symbol. The CPU 411 controls the display of the normal symbols based on the stored contents of the universal symbol determination result storage area 413j in which the determination results of the universal symbol determination, the universal symbol determination, and the universal symbol variation pattern determination are stored. For example, after the normal symbol is changed for the fluctuation time indicated by the normal symbol variation pattern, the normal symbol is stopped at the symbol indicating both the determination result of the universal symbol determination and the determination result of the normal symbol determination.

  The CPU 411 executes the electric accessory control process by the electric accessory control processing program in the ROM 412 (see FIG. 15). In the electric accessory control process, the big prize opening process and the electric chew process are sequentially executed.

――― Prize winning opening pattern table; Fig.9 ―――
FIG. 9 shows an example of the special winning opening opening pattern table DKt. The CPU 411 executes the special winning a prize mouth processing by the special winning a prize mouth processing program in the ROM 412 (see FIG. 15). In the big prize opening process, the CPU 411 opens and closes the big prize opening 109 based on the result of the special symbol process. As shown in FIG. 9, in the big prize opening pattern table DKt, a plurality of big prize opening patterns DKp1 to DKp10 that define the opening mode of the big prize opening 109 for each type of jackpot, and the big prize at the time of winning the small prize A special winning opening opening pattern DKp11 that defines the opening mode of the opening 109 is stored. Special winning opening opening patterns corresponding to special A, special B, special C, special D, special E, special F, special G, general A, general B, and general C are the special prize opening patterns DKp1, DKp2, DKp3, DKp4, DKp5, DKp6, DKp7, DKp8, DKp9, and DKp10.

  When the result of the special symbol process indicates that the jackpot is won, the jackpot 109 is opened / closed using a jackpot opening pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot. When the processing result of the special symbol processing indicates winning of a small win, the special winning opening 109 is opened / closed using the special winning opening opening pattern DKp11.

  Each of the patterns DKp1 to DKp11 defines the number of rounds Rmax in the big hit or the small win, the opening time of the big winning opening 109 in each round, the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time. The opening time, interval time, and ending time are common among the patterns DKp1 to DKp11, and are 5 seconds, 2 seconds, and 5 seconds, respectively. The opening time, the interval time, or the ending time may be different between any two or more patterns included in the patterns DKp1 to DKp11.

  The round number Rmax in the patterns DKp1 to DKp3 and DKp8 to DKp10 is 4, the round number Rmax in the patterns DKp4 and DKp7 is 16, and the round number Rmax in the patterns DKp5, DKp6, and DKp11 is 2. When the big win or the small win is won, the opening of the first round of the big winning opening 109 is started after opening by the opening time, and the big winning opening 109 is opened by the corresponding round number Rmax. Thereafter, ending is performed based on the ending time, and an ending command for instructing the end of the hit effect is set in the RAM 413. The interval time indicates the time between rounds adjacent to each other.

  In the big winning opening opening patterns DKp1 to DKp4 and DKp7 to DKp10, the opening time of the big winning opening 109 in each round is a predetermined time (long opening time) for 30 seconds. In each round of the big winning opening opening patterns DKp1 to DKp4 and DKp8 to DKp10, the big winning opening 109 is continuously opened for 30 seconds. In each round other than the first round of the big prize opening pattern DKp7, the big prize opening 109 is continuously opened for 30 seconds. However, in each round when the big prize opening patterns DKp1 to DKp4 and DKp7 to DKp10 are used, even if the opening time of the big prize opening 109 has not reached 30 seconds, the winning of the game ball to the big prize opening 109 is won. When the number reaches a predetermined value (for example, 10), the special winning opening 109 is closed and the round ends.

With reference to FIG. 10A, the special winning opening opening pattern DKp7 in the first round in the special G jackpot will be described. In the first round of the special G jackpot game, the grand prize opening 109 is opened for a predetermined short opening time t _JUBO1 , then the big winning opening 109 is closed for a predetermined time t _JUBC1 and then the big winning opening 109 is short-opened again. After the time t _{JUBO1 is} opened, the _special prize opening 109 is closed for a predetermined time t _JUBC2 , and then the _special prize opening 109 is opened for a predetermined long opening time t _JUBO2 . The sum of the two times and time _{t JUBO2} of time _{t JUBO1} is 30 seconds.

FIGS. 10B, 10C, and 10D show the big winning opening patterns DKp5, DKp6, and DKp11 for the special E jackpot, the special F jackpot, and the small jackpot, respectively. The opening times of the special winning opening 109 in each round of special E and special F jackpot games are predetermined short opening times t _EO and t _FO , respectively. A game involving the opening of the big winning opening 109 at the time of winning a small hit is called a small hit game. Opening time of the special winning opening 109 in each round of small prize game is a predetermined short open time t _SO. As with the jackpot game, even though the jackpot game is a short time, the big prize opening 109 is opened, so that the game state in which the jackpot game is played is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. It can be said that the game is a state (in other words, the small hit game is more advantageous to the player than the game in the normal game state). The advantage in the big hit game or the small hit game is that the player easily obtains more prize balls as the big prize opening 109 is opened as compared with the game in the normal game state (the expected value of the prize ball to be obtained is larger). Means big).

_{Each of} the short opening times t _JUBO1 , t _EO , t _FO and t _SO is shorter than the opening time (30 seconds) of the big winning opening 109 in each round in the big winning opening opening patterns DKp1 to DKp4 and DKp8 to DKp10, and The opening time of the big winning opening 109 in each round in the second to sixteenth rounds of the big winning opening opening pattern DKp7 is shorter than 30 seconds and shorter than the long opening time t _JUBO2 in the big winning opening opening pattern DKp7. . _{Each of the} times (2 × t _JUBO1 ), (2 × t _EO ), (2 × t _FO ), and (2 × t _SO ) is large in each round in the big prize opening opening patterns DKp1 to DKp4 and DKp8 to DKp10. It is shorter than the opening time (30 seconds) of the winning opening 109 and shorter than the opening time (30 seconds) of the large winning opening 109 in each round in the second to 16th rounds of the large winning opening pattern DKp7. It is shorter than the long opening time t _JUBO2 in the winning opening opening pattern DKp7.

The short opening times t _JUBO1 , t _EO , t _FO and t _SO are the same time, and are 0.2 seconds here. Therefore, the long opening time t _JUBO2 is 29.6 seconds. However, when the player sees the opening of the grand prize opening 109 due to the short opening time (hereinafter also referred to as short opening), is the opening the special prize opening 109 due to special E, special F or small hits? The short opening times t _JUBO1 , t _EO , t _FO, and t _SO may be slightly different from each other to the extent that the player can not easily distinguish whether the special winning opening 109 of the first round of Special G is open. .

Times t _JUBC1 and t _JUBC2 (see FIG. 10 (a)) are _preferably made to coincide with the interval time (2 seconds) and the ending time (5 seconds), respectively. As a result, even if a special G is won, the short opening of the special winning opening 109 is special E, special F, special G and until the opening of the special winning entry 109 with the long opening time t _JUBO2 is seen. It becomes difficult for the player to recognize which of the small hits is due. As a result, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation for the special E, special F or special G and anxiety about the small hit, and the fun of the game increases.

  In each of the above-mentioned special E, special F and special G jackpot games and small jackpot games, the number of times of opening of the big winning opening 109 by the short opening time is two times. The number of times of opening 109 may be three or more, or may be one. However, it is preferable that the number of times the special winning opening 109 is opened by the short opening time is common among the big hit games and the special hit games by the special E, special F and special G.

  Further, the special winning opening processing program causes the game state setting processing program to be executed as a subprogram (see FIG. 15). In the game state setting process by the game state setting process program, the CPU 411 sets various game flags such as a high-probability game flag and an electric support game flag that determine the game state in the game flag storage area 413f. As described above, the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 is a high probability gaming state when the high probability gaming flag is ON, and a low probability gaming state when the high probability gaming flag is OFF. The gaming state of the gaming machine 100 is an electric support game state when the electric support game flag is ON, and a non-electric support game state when the electric support game flag is OFF. In the game state setting process during the big prize opening process executed in response to the occurrence of the jackpot, the high probability game flag and the electric support game flag are set ON / OFF according to the type of the jackpot that has occurred, Depending on the type of jackpot that occurred, the high probability remaining game number X indicating the remaining number of variations of the special symbol that maintains the high probability gaming state and the remaining variation number of the special symbol that maintains the electric support game state The electric support game remaining number J is set in the RAM 413. Therefore, in the game state setting process associated with the special A to special E or special G jackpot (see FIG. 6), both the high-probability game flag and the electric support game flag are turned ON, and “10000” is set to the number of times X and J. Assigned. In the gaming state setting process associated with the special F jackpot, the high probability gaming flag is turned ON and “10000” is substituted for the number of times X. In the game state setting process associated with the big hits of A, B and C, the electric support game flag is turned ON, and “10”, “20”, and “30” are substituted for the number of times J, respectively.

  The high probability remaining game count X set in the game state setting process is subtracted by “1” every time the special symbol process is executed when “X ≧ 1”, and becomes “X = 0”. The high probability game flag is set to OFF, and the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 becomes a low probability gaming state. The electric support game remaining number J set in the game state setting process is decremented by “1” every time the special symbol process is executed when “J ≧ 1”, and becomes “J = 0”. The electric support game flag is set to OFF, and the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 becomes a non-electric support game state. In the initial state of the gaming machine 100, the high probability game flag and the electric support game flag are OFF, and “0” is set to the number of times X and J. By pushing a RAM clear switch (not shown) provided on the back of the game board 101, the gaming machine 100 is in an initial state.

  The CPU 411 executes electric-chu processing by the electric-chu processing program in the ROM 412 (see FIG. 15). In the electric chew process, the CPU 411 opens and closes the electric tulip 107 based on the result of the normal symbol process. When the normal symbol lottery is won, the electric tulip 107 is opened for a predetermined time.

  The CPU 411 executes prize ball processing by a prize ball processing program in the ROM 412 (see FIG. 15). In the prize ball processing, the CPU 411 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls for winning at each of the first start opening 105, the second start opening 106, the big winning opening 109, and the normal winning opening 110. The payout instruction is set in the prize ball information storage area 413g as a prize ball command.

  The CPU 411 executes output processing according to the output processing program in the ROM 412 (see FIG. 15). In the output process, the CPU 411 stores information (including arbitrary commands) indicating the storage contents of each storage area in the RAM 413, etc., in each control unit (the prize ball control unit 402 and the effect control unit) connected to the main control unit 401. 403). A command related to the prize ball is output to the prize ball control unit 402, and a command related to the effect is output to the effect control unit 403. In the output process, the CPU 411 can transmit arbitrary information recognized or held by itself (for example, information indicating the status of the electric support game flag and the high probability game flag) to the effect control unit 403. When the output process ends, the timer interrupt process also ends. When the timer interrupt process ends, the process executed by the CPU 411 returns to the main process (see FIG. 15).

――― Preliminary information storage area; Fig.11――
Further, the above-described start port switch processing program executes a pre-determination processing program that realizes pre-determination processing as a subprogram (see FIG. 15). In the pre-determination process by the pre-determination process program in the ROM 412, the CPU 411 sets the special figure determination information that is stored in the special figure determination information storage area 413 d and is held as a pre-determination target. The special figure hit judgment, special figure design judgment and special figure variation pattern judgment are sequentially executed. The method of special figure determination, special symbol design, and special figure variation pattern determination for the prior determination target is the same as those for the determination target TT. The determination result of the pre-determination process (that is, the determination result of the special figure for the pre-determination target, the determination result of the special symbol design and the special figure variation pattern determination) is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 413h, The pre-determination command including the setting is set in the RAM 413 to be sent to the effect control unit 403. The pre-determination process for certain special figure determination information is executed in the start port switch process when the special figure determination information is acquired.

  FIG. 11 shows an example of the advance determination information storage area 413h. The storage area 413h has first to eighth storage areas. The i-th storage area in the storage area 413h stores the result of the pre-determination process for the special figure determination information stored in the special figure determination information storage area 413d and having the i-th priority.

  In addition, you may make it memorize | store the information which shows the symbol showing both the determination result of special symbol determination, and the determination result of special symbol determination in the prior determination information storage area 413h. Specifically, for example, when the determination results of special figure determination and special symbol design determination for special figure determination information to be preliminarily determined indicate special A and special B jackpots, respectively, in the preliminary determination information storage area 413h, While the symbols “1” and “2” are stored, when they indicate a loss, the symbol “−” may be stored in the prior determination information storage area 413h.

  As shown in FIG. 4, a board external information terminal board 491 is connected to the main control section 401, and the main control section 401 sends information indicating the storage contents in the RAM 413 to the outside (for example, through the board 491). Can be output to a hall computer).

[2. Prize ball control unit]
Referring to FIG. 4, the prize ball control unit 402 includes a CPU 421, a ROM 422, a RAM 423, an input / output interface (I / O) (not shown), and the like. Based on the payout instruction (prize ball command) from the main control unit 401, the CPU 421 reads various programs related to the payout of prize balls from the ROM 422, executes the read program using the RAM 423 as a work area, The prize balls are paid out according to the payout instructions.

  Various SWs for detecting a game ball are connected to the prize ball control unit 402. For example, as shown in the drawing, the prize ball control unit 402 includes a fixed position detection SW 424 for detecting a game ball at a predetermined position, a payout ball detection SW425 for detecting a paid game ball, and a hit ball provided on the front surface of the frame. A ball presence detection SW 426 that detects whether there is a game ball in the supply tray 120 and a full tank detection SW 427 that detects that the hitting ball supply tray 120 is filled with the game ball are connected.

  Each of SW 424 to 427 outputs a detection signal indicating whether or not a game ball has been detected to the prize ball control unit 402. The winning ball control unit 402 pays out a winning ball or stops paying out a winning ball based on a payout instruction output from the main control unit 401 or a detection signal input from the SWs 424 to 427. Further, the prize ball control unit 402 may output detection signals input from the SWs 424 to 427 to the main control unit 401.

  Further, a launching unit 428 is connected to the prize ball control unit 402. The award ball control unit 402 detects the operation of launching a game ball with respect to the launch unit 428 (operation by the player) and controls the launch of the game ball. The launcher 428 launches a game ball for a game, and includes a sensor that detects a game operation by the player, a solenoid that launches the game ball, and the like. When the prize ball control unit 402 detects a game operation by the sensor of the launch unit 428, the game ball 103 is intermittently fired by driving a solenoid or the like in response to the detected game operation, and the game area 103 of the game board 101 is played. Launch a game ball.

  The prize ball control unit 402 is connected to a payout unit 429 for paying out a prize ball. The payout unit 429 includes a payout drive motor for paying out a predetermined number of game balls from a storage unit (not shown) that stores game balls. The prize ball control unit 402 controls the payout unit 429 to drive the payout drive motor, thereby to each winning port (the first starting port 105, the second starting port 106, the big winning port 109, the normal winning port 110). The payout of prize balls corresponding to the winnings of will be realized. The prize ball controller 402 is connected to a frame external information terminal board 492, and various information handled by the prize ball controller 402 can be output to the outside through the board 492.

[3. Production control unit]
Next, the effect control unit 403 of the gaming machine 100 will be described.

[3-1. Director of Production]
FIG. 12 is a partial block diagram of the gaming machine 100 including an internal block diagram of the effect control unit 403. The effect control unit 403 includes an effect control unit 403a that controls the entire effect control unit 403, an image / audio control unit 403b that performs display control of the image display unit 104 and sound output control of the speaker 114, an effect light unit 115, and A lamp control unit 403c for performing lighting control of the board lamp 135 on the game board 101 and driving control of the movable accessory 130 is provided.

  The production control unit 403a includes a CPU 431, a ROM 432, a RAM 433, an input / output interface (I / O) (not shown), and the like. The CPU 431 reads out various programs relating to the control of effects performed by the gaming machine 100 from the ROM 432, and executes the read programs using the RAM 433 as a work area.

  In addition, an effect button 118 and a cross key 119 for receiving an operation from a player are connected to the effect control unit 403a. When the effect button 118 is operated (ie, pressed) by the player, the effect button 118 outputs a control signal indicating that effect to the effect control unit 403a. The cross key 119 includes a plurality of keys, and outputs a control signal corresponding to the key operated (that is, pressed) by the player to the effect control unit 403a. Based on the control signal input from the effect button 118 and the cross key 119, the effect supervision unit 403a sets an operation command indicating that the operation by the player has been accepted and the operation content in the RAM 433.

  Here, an example of a program executed by the CPU 431 of the production control unit 403a and an example of information set (i.e., stored) in the RAM 433 by executing each program will be described. Note that the processing, programs, tables, and storage areas shown below for the production control unit 403a are only a part of the processing performed by the CPU 431, the programs and tables in the ROM 432, and the storage areas in the RAM 433, and various other types. Various processes, programs, tables, and storage areas are executed by the CPU 431 or prepared in the ROM 432 or the RAM 433. As shown in FIG. 12, the ROM 432 stores tables TEt, Mt, AEt, and FEt, and the RAM 433 has storage areas 433a to 433d.

  The CPU 431 executes the effect main process by the effect main process program in the ROM 432 (see FIG. 16). The production main process is executed in response to the supply of power to the production control unit 403a. In the effect main processing, the effect supervising unit 403a performs initial setting of a built-in device such as CTC in the effect supervising unit 403a and stores the setting contents in the setting storage area 433a.

  The CPU 431 executes the effect timer interrupt process by the effect timer interrupt process program in the ROM 432 (see FIG. 16). The effect timer interrupt process is interrupted and executed with respect to the effect main process at a predetermined cycle stored in the setting storage area 433a by the effect main process. In the effect timer interruption process, a command reception process, an operation reception process, and a command transmission process are sequentially executed.

  The CPU 431 executes command reception processing by a command reception processing program in the ROM 432. In the command reception process, the CPU 431 causes various subprograms in the ROM 432 to be executed. The various processes executed in association with the command reception process include a special drawing effect processing program in the ROM 432, a special drawing effect processing program and a special drawing effect processing program, and a normal drawing effect process and a win effect processing (FIG. 16).

  The special figure effect process includes an effect start process and an effect end process. The effect control unit 403 executes the effect production by executing the effect start process in response to the reception of the change start command, and then executes the effect end process in response to the reception of the change stop command. finish. The effect start process includes a variable effect pattern selection process. In the variation effect pattern selection process, the CPU 431 selects and determines a special figure variation effect pattern from the special figure variation effect pattern table TEt stored in the ROM 432 based on a command received from the main control unit 401 or the like. The variation effect by the selected and determined special figure variation effect pattern is executed in the special figure effect process.

――― Special drawing variation pattern table; Fig.13 ―――
FIG. 13 shows an example of the special figure variation effect pattern table TEt. In the table TEt, a plurality of special figure variation effect patterns that define the effect contents of the variation effects such as the normal lose effect and the reach effect are stored. In FIG. 13, six different special figure fluctuation effect patterns TEp_d11 to TEp_d16 are shown as part of the special figure fluctuation effect patterns stored in the table TEt. The special figure variation effect patterns TEp_d11 to TEp_d16 are associated with the special figure fluctuation patterns THp_d11 to THp_d16 (see FIG. 8) on a one-to-one basis.

  The variation effect refers to an effect executed by the effect control unit 403 at the time of the variation of the special symbol and the end of the variation, and may be specifically referred to as a special diagram variation effect. In the gaming machine 100, an arbitrary effect including a variable effect is realized using an effect realizing element. The effect realization element includes at least one of image display by the image display unit 104, sound output by the speaker 114, light emission by the effect light unit 115, light emission by the panel lamp 135, and driving of the movable accessory 130.

  The variation effect patterns include a variation effect pattern related to a special symbol (that is, a special diagram variation effect pattern) and a variation effect pattern related to a normal symbol (that is, an ordinary diagram variation effect pattern). Since the variation effect related to the special symbol is mainly discussed, the special diagram variation effect pattern table and the special diagram variation effect pattern may be hereinafter referred to as a variation effect pattern table and a variation effect pattern.

  The normal lose effect is a normal lose effect that is associated with the special figure variation pattern THp_d11 and appears most frequently. Reach production means that, for example, when three decorative symbols (first decorative symbol to third decorative symbol) are changed, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are aligned on the effective line, and then the third decorative symbol is arranged. This is an effect in which only the symbol is changed, and the fluctuation time is longer than that of the normal loss production, so that the expectation for the big hit is increased. The reach production includes a normal reach production, a low reliability reach production, a medium reliability reach production, a high reliability reach production, and a premier reach production. The premier reach production is a production showing the jackpot decision. In the order of low-reliability reach production, medium-reliability reach production, high-reliability reach production, and premier reach production, the reliability for the big hit is high.

  In the command reception process, the CPU 431 determines that the stored content of the special figure determination result storage area 433b in the effect control unit 403a is the special figure determination of the main control unit 401 based on a command (for example, a change start command) received from the main control unit 401. The storage contents of the storage area 433b can be updated so as to be the same as the storage contents of the result storage area 413e. In the variation effect pattern selection process, a variation effect pattern corresponding to the special figure variation pattern is selected using the special figure variation effect pattern table TEt based on the information of the special figure variation pattern in the updated storage area 433b. The selection result can be included in the storage area 433b. Then, the CPU 431 sets a variation effect start command including information indicating the selected variation effect pattern in the transmission command storage area 433d as an instruction to start the variation effect so that the variation effect corresponding to the selected variation effect pattern is realized. (I.e., memorize)

  Further, in the command reception process, the CPU 431 determines the advance determination information storage area 413h of the main control section 401 and the advance determination information storage area of the production control section 403a based on a command (for example, advance determination command) received from the main control section 401. The stored contents with 433c are synchronized. By this synchronization, the storage content of the storage area 433c can be made the same as that of the storage area 413h. However, each special figure fluctuation effect pattern corresponding to each special figure fluctuation pattern in the storage area 413h can be stored in the storage area 433c (see FIGS. 11, 13, and 14).

――― Preliminary information storage area; Fig.14 ―――
FIG. 14 shows an example of the advance determination information storage area 433c. The storage area 433c has first to eighth storage areas. In the i-th storage area in the storage area 433c, the determination result of the pre-determination process for the special figure determination information stored in the special figure determination information storage area 413d and having the i-th priority (determination per special figure) And the determination result of the special symbol design determination) and the selection result of the variation effect pattern are stored. The variation effect pattern selection result for certain special figure determination information is the variation effect pattern selected by the variation effect pattern selection process based on the special figure variation pattern for the special figure determination information and the variation effect pattern table TEt. (See FIGS. 11, 13 and 14).

  In the storage area 433c according to the example of FIG. 14, the fluctuation effect pattern TEp_d12 for the normal reach effect is stored in the first storage area, and the change effect pattern TEp_d11 for the normal lose effect is stored in the second storage area. A variation effect pattern TEp_d15 for high-reliability reach effect is stored in the storage area. Furthermore, the third storage area stores information indicating the special jackpot of special A as the judgment results of special figure hit judgment and special figure symbol judgment. The effect control unit 403 can also perform a series of continuous effects over a plurality of variable effects based on the stored contents of the storage area 433c.

  The ordinary drawing effect process (see FIG. 16) is executed by the CPU 431 when a command related to a normal symbol is received from the main control unit 401. In the ordinary drawing effect process, the ordinary drawing effect is executed when the normal symbol changes, using the ordinary figure variation effect pattern table FEt (see FIG. 12).

  The hit effect pattern table AEt in the ROM 432 stores a plurality of hit effect patterns. Each hit effect pattern defines the effect contents of the hit effect performed during the big hit game or the small hit game. The effect control unit 403 starts the hit effect by executing the hit effect process (see FIG. 16) in response to the reception of the opening command from the main control unit 401, and receives the ending command from the main control unit 401. In response, the winning presentation is ended. In the winning effect process, the effect control unit 403 selects a winning effect pattern according to the winning type from the table AEt, and executes a winning effect based on the selected winning effect pattern.

  The CPU 431 executes an operation reception process by the operation reception process program in the ROM 432 (see FIG. 16). In the operation reception process, the CPU 431 receives control signals from the effect button 118 and the cross key 119, and sets (that is, stores) an operation command indicating that there is a player operation in the transmission command storage area 433d.

  The CPU 431 executes command transmission processing by a command transmission processing program in the ROM 432 (see FIG. 16). In the command transmission process, the CPU 431 transmits various commands stored in the transmission command storage area 433d from the effect control unit 403a to the image / audio control unit 403b or the lamp control unit 403c. The image / audio control unit 403b and the lamp control unit 403c realize an effect in accordance with a command from the effect control unit 403a using the effect realizing element.

[3-2. Image / sound control unit]
Referring to FIG. 12, the image / audio control unit 403b includes a CPU 441, a ROM 442, a RAM 443, an input / output interface (I / O) (not shown), and the like. The CPU 441 reads out various programs in accordance with instructions from the production control unit 403a from the ROM 442, and uses the RAM 443 as a work area to execute the read programs, thereby realizing the production instructed to be executed from the production management unit 403a. .

  The ROM 442 stores production data. The effect data includes image data such as a background image, a decorative design image, a character image, a hold image, a notice effect image, sound data such as sound effects and BGM, and the like.

  The CPU 441 can control the display content of the image display unit 104. For example, the CPU 441 reads image data corresponding to the effect instructed to be executed by the effect control unit 403a from the ROM 442, and causes the image display unit 104 to display an image based on the read image data. At this time, the CPU 441 can superimpose a plurality of images on the display screen of the image display unit 104. When a plurality of images overlap at the same position on the display screen of the image display unit 104, a layer in which these images are stacked in a hierarchical structure is set. For example, a background image is set in the lower layer, a decorative design is set in the upper layer, and a preview image is set in the upper layer. Thereby, it is possible to display so that the decorative design can be seen in front of the background image and the preview image can be seen in front of the decorative design.

  In addition, the CPU 441 reads audio data corresponding to the effect instructed to be executed by the effect supervising unit 403a from the ROM 442, and causes the speaker 114 to output sound based on the read audio data.

  Further, when the button effect is executed, the CPU 441 sets a predetermined effective period for the button effect, and is defined by the button effect when an operation input to the effect button 118 is detected within the effective period. The read image data is read from the ROM 442, and an image based on the read image data is displayed on the image display unit 104, and / or the sound data defined by the button effect is read from the ROM 442, and the sound based on the read sound data is reproduced. Output from the speaker 114.

[3-3. Lamp control unit]
The lamp control unit 403c includes a CPU 451, a ROM 452, a RAM 453, an input / output interface (I / O) (not shown), and the like. The CPU 451 reads out various programs according to instructions from the production control unit 403a from the ROM 452, and executes the read programs using the RAM 453 as a work area.

  The lamp control unit 403c can perform lighting control of the effect light unit 115 and the panel lamp 135 and drive control of the movable accessory 130 based on the command received from the effect control unit 403a. When the movable accessory 130 includes a lamp, the drive control of the movable accessory 130 includes lighting control of the lamp in the movable accessory 130. In addition, an accessory sensor (not shown) for detecting the position of the movable accessory 130 is connected to the lamp controller 403c, and the lamp controller 403c drives the movable accessory 130 based on a detection signal of the accessory sensor. Control can be performed.

<< About reliability >>
Here, the explanation of the term “reliability” will be supplemented. In the case where certain effect Q ₂ for a certain one of JP diagram determination information Q ₁ is carried out, the probability that special symbol determination information Q ₁ is elected jackpot, i.e., based on the special symbol determination information Q ₁ expected value is determined jackpot in the determination per special symbol (the expected value of the probability theory), reliability of jackpot, the reliability of the special symbol determination information Q _1, or, referred to as the reliability of the effect Q _2, or , terms related to special symbol determination information Q ₁ or effect Q ₂ (e.g., hold the image for special symbol determination information Q ₁ that is suspended) while correlated to simply as reliability. For example, if the information Q ₁ is being held, it is sometimes referred to as reliability information Q ₁ and so the reliability of the hold. The information Q ₁ is being held, the information Q ₁ is be stored in the special symbol determination information storage area 413d, variation of the special symbols based on information Q ₁ is refers to a condition that has not been started yet. Effect Q ₂ are to be located in the notice made during variation of the special symbols that correspond to special symbol determination information Q ₁ (the announcement attraction), fluctuations before the start of the special symbols that correspond to special symbol determination information Q ₁ Can be a pre-reading notice (pre-reading notice effect).

For one Japanese view determination information Q _1, expressed as a probability "r" to effect Q ₂ is performed on the result of a "loss" and special symbol determination information to Q ₁ determination per special symbol, results of the determination per special symbol is represented by a probability and a "big hit" effect against special symbol determination information Q ₁ Q ₂ are performed "v". Then, the reliability of the jackpot when effect _{Q 2} is performed on the special symbol determination information _{Q 1} is a (100 × v / (r + v))%.

For example, in a gaming state in which Japanese view variation pattern table THt_d are used in FIG. 8, one of the Japanese view determination information _{Q 1} is a "loss" and special symbol determination information _{Q 1} is special symbol variation pattern THp_d13 Assignment probability r is to be a "(398/399) × (5/500) ", 1 single Japanese view determination information _{Q 1} is "big hit" in a by and special symbol determination information _{Q 1} to special symbol variation pattern THp_d13 since the probability v assigned is "(1/399) × (50/500) ", the reliability of the jackpot when JP diagram fluctuation pattern THp_d13 is assigned to special symbol determination information _{Q 1} (Japanese reliability of FIG determination information _{Q 1,} reliability of the effects by JP diagram variation pattern THp_d13) is about 2.5%. Similarly example, the reliability of the jackpot when JP diagram fluctuation pattern THp_d15 is assigned to special symbol determination information _{Q 1} (special symbol reliability of the determination information _{Q 1,} reliability of the effect by JP diagram fluctuation pattern THp_d15 Degree) is about 42.2%.

<< Relationship between production mode and special figure variation pattern table >>
Further, the CPU 431 selects and sets one effect mode from a plurality of effect modes defined in the effect mode table Mt, based on the command received from the main control unit 401. The effect mode selected here may be hereinafter referred to as a target effect mode. The effect control unit 403 performs an effect in the target effect mode. The plurality of effect modes include a chance mode, a branch effect mode, a probability change mode, a reference mode, and a latent mode as first to fifth effect modes. The effect control unit 403 executes different effects between the chance mode, the branch effect mode, the probability change mode, the reference mode, and the latent mode. The significance of each effect mode will become clear from the following description.

  FIG. 17 shows an example of the effect mode table Mt. As shown in FIG. 17, a mode flag is associated with each effect mode in the effect mode table Mt. When the chance mode, the branching mode, the probability variation mode, the reference mode, and the latent mode are selected and used as the production mode, the mode flags are “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, respectively. This corresponds to a state in which "" is set. The mode flag is stored in the RAM 433 and its value is variably set by the CPU 431.

  FIG. 18 shows the relationship between the effect mode and the special figure variation pattern table. Hereinafter, for clarity of explanation, the special figure fluctuation pattern table selected and used in the special figure fluctuation pattern determination may be referred to as a target special figure fluctuation pattern table.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a special figure fluctuation pattern table (that is, a target special figure fluctuation pattern table) that is selected and used for the determination target TT of the first special symbol after the jackpot game ends.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating a special figure fluctuation pattern table (that is, a target special figure fluctuation pattern table) that is selected and used for the determination target TT of the second special symbol after the jackpot game ends.

  As shown in FIG. 18 (see also FIG. 7), the main control unit 401 causes the chance mode special figure fluctuation pattern table THt_a, the branching effect mode special figure fluctuation pattern table THt_b, the probability variation mode special figure fluctuation pattern table THt_c, When the special mode fluctuation pattern table THt_d for the reference mode and the special figure fluctuation pattern table THt_e for the latent mode are selected and used as the target special figure fluctuation pattern table, the effect control unit 403 performs the chance mode, the branch effect mode, and the probability change, respectively. The mode, the reference mode, and the latent mode are selected and set as the target effect mode.

  In the initial state, the reference mode special figure fluctuation pattern table THt_d is set in the target special figure fluctuation pattern table and the reference mode is set in the target effect mode.

  Tables THt_a, THt_b, and THt_c are associated with the special A jackpot. After the jackpot game with the special A jackpot, the table THt_a is set as the target special figure fluctuation pattern table for the first to ninth special symbol fluctuations, and for the tenth special symbol fluctuation. The table THt_b is set as the target special figure fluctuation pattern table, and the table THt_c is set as the target special figure fluctuation pattern table for the special symbol fluctuation after the eleventh time.

  However, when the next jackpot is won after the jackpot game with the special A jackpot ends, the target special figure variation pattern table after the next jackpot game is set according to the type of the next jackpot. The same applies to the target special figure variation pattern table after the big hit game with the big hit other than the special A. If the jackpot type is the same, the target special figure variation pattern table used after the jackpot game ends is common between the jackpot for the first special symbol and the jackpot for the second special symbol. In other words, for example, regardless of whether the special A jackpot is a jackpot for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first to ninth special bonuses after the jackpot game with the special A jackpot ends The table THt_a is set as the target special figure variation pattern table for the symbol variation, and the table THt_b is set as the target special symbol variation pattern table for the tenth special symbol variation, and the eleventh time. The table THt_c is set as a target special figure fluctuation pattern table for subsequent special symbol fluctuations. The same applies to jackpots other than Special A.

  Tables THt_a, THt_b, and THt_c are associated with the special B jackpot. After the jackpot game with the special B jackpot, the table THt_a is set as the target special figure variation pattern table for the first to ninth and eleventh to nineteenth special symbol variations, and the tenth and twentieth special symbols. The table THt_b is set as the target special figure fluctuation pattern table for the fluctuations in the above, and the table THt_c is set as the target special figure fluctuation pattern table for the fluctuations in the special symbols after the 21st time.

  Tables THt_a, THt_b, and THt_c are associated with the special C jackpot. After the jackpot game with the special C jackpot, the table THt_a is set as the target special figure variation pattern table for the first to ninth, 11th to 19th and 21st to 29th special symbol variations, and 10, 20 For the 30th special symbol variation, the table THt_b is set as the target special symbol variation pattern table, and for the 31st special symbol variation and thereafter, the table THt_c is set as the target special symbol variation pattern table. Is done.

  Tables THt_c are associated with special D, special E and special G jackpots. After the jackpot game with the special D, special E or special G jackpot, the table THt_c is set as the target special figure fluctuation pattern table from the first special symbol fluctuation, and the second and subsequent special symbol fluctuations The table THt_c is set as the target special figure variation pattern table.

  Tables THt_a, THt_b, and THt_d are associated with the jackpot of the total A. After the end of the jackpot game due to the big hit of A, the table THt_a is set as the target special figure variation pattern table for the first to ninth special symbol variations, and for the tenth special symbol variation. The table THt_b is set as the target special figure fluctuation pattern table, and the table THt_d is set as the target special figure fluctuation pattern table for the 11th and subsequent special symbol fluctuations.

  Tables THt_a, THt_b, and THt_d are associated with the jackpot of the letter B. The table THt_a is set as the target special figure variation pattern table for the first to ninth and the eleventh to nineteenth special symbol variations after the end of the big hit game by the big hit of B, and the tenth and twentieth special symbols. The table THt_b is set as the target special figure fluctuation pattern table for the fluctuations in the above, and the table THt_d is set as the target special figure fluctuation pattern table for the special symbol fluctuations after the 21st time.

  Tables THt_a, THt_b, and THt_d are associated with the jackpot of the total C. After the jackpot game with the big hit of C, the table THt_a is set as the target special figure fluctuation pattern table for the first to ninth, 11th to 19th and 21st to 29th special symbol fluctuations, and 10, 20 For the 30th special symbol variation, the table THt_b is set as the target special symbol variation pattern table, and for the special symbol variation after the 31st time, the table THt_d is set as the target special symbol variation pattern table. Is done.

  The table THt_e is associated with the special F jackpot. After the jackpot game with the special F jackpot, the table THt_e is set as the target special figure fluctuation pattern table from the first special symbol fluctuation, and the table THt_e is also the target special figure for the second and subsequent special symbol fluctuations. Set as a variation pattern table. The main control unit 401 may maintain the target special figure variation pattern table in the table THt_e until the next jackpot is won after the jackpot game with the special F jackpot ends. However, when the special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of times (for example, 40 times) without winning the next jackpot after the jackpot game with the special F jackpot, the main controller 401 changes the target special figure fluctuation pattern table. May be changed from the table THt_e to the table THt_d.

  Similarly to the special F, the table THt_e is associated with the small hit. After the small hit game with small hits, the table THt_e is set as the target special figure variation pattern table from the first special symbol variation, and the table THt_e is also subject to the special symbol variation for the second and subsequent special symbol variations. Set as a pattern table. When the special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of times (for example, 40 times) without winning the next jackpot after the end of the small hit game, the main control unit 401 changes the target special figure fluctuation pattern table from the table THt_e to the table THt_d. It is good to change to.

  FIGS. 21A to 21E show display examples of the image display unit 104 in the chance mode, the branching effect mode, the probability variation mode, the reference mode, and the latent mode, respectively. In each effect mode, the effect control unit 403 can display a background image on the image display unit 104 and can superimpose a decorative design or the like on the background image. The background images are different from each other between the chance mode, the branching effect mode, the probability changing mode, the reference mode, and the latent mode. .

  The chance mode (see FIG. 18) corresponding to the table THt_a is commonly used for the low probability electric support game state and the high probability electric support game state, and indicates to the player that the current game state is the electric support game state. This is a suggestion mode. Therefore, the player who has seen the effect in the chance mode cannot determine whether the current gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the low probability gaming state or cannot easily determine. It should be noted that the effects in the chance mode, the probability change mode, and the branch effect mode include effects that prompt the player to make a right strike (for example, display of characters such as “Please make a right strike”).

  The probability variation mode (see FIG. 18) corresponding to the table THt_c is used in the high-probability electric support game state, and an effect mode (a jackpot winning prize) that suggests to the player that the current game state is the high-probability electric support game state. This is a specific performance mode that suggests to the player that the probability is controlled with a high probability. Therefore, the player who has seen the effect in the probability variation mode can relatively easily understand that the current gaming state is the high probability electric support gaming state.

  The branch effect mode (see FIG. 18) corresponding to the table THt_b is used in common for the low probability electric support game state and the high probability electric support game state and the current game state is the electric support game state, as in the chance mode. It is a production mode that suggests to the player that there is something. However, the effect of the branch effect mode is a branch that suggests at least one of the continuation of the game in the chance mode and the electric support game state maintained after the end of the jackpot game and the transition to the probability change mode. Includes production. A specific example of the branch effect will be described later.

  The reference mode (see FIG. 18) corresponding to the table THt_d is an effect mode that is used in the low probability non-electric support game state and suggests to the player that the current game state is the low probability non-electric support game state. . Therefore, the player who has seen the effect in the reference mode can relatively easily understand that the current gaming state is the low probability non-electric support gaming state.

  The latent mode (see FIG. 18) corresponding to the table THt_e is commonly used for the low probability non-electric support game state and the high probability non-electric support game state, and the current game state may be the high probability game state. This is a production mode that suggests to the player. Therefore, the player who has seen the effect in the latent mode can play a game with a sense of expectation that the current gaming state is a high probability gaming state.

  In this way, when the main control unit 401 controls the game in the low-probability gaming state after the jackpot game, the main control unit 401 continues to display the power until the special symbol variation display for the predetermined number of times (10th, 20th or 30th) is completed. If the game is controllable in the support game state and the game is controlled in the high probability game state after the big hit game, the special symbol variation display for the predetermined number of times (10th, 20th or 30th) is finished. However, the game can be continuously controlled in the electric support game state.

  In addition, when the main control unit 401 controls the game in the low probability game state after the jackpot game, the main control unit 401 controls the game in the electric support game state until the predetermined first variation of the special symbol is ended. There are times when the game is controlled in the electric support game state until the variable display of the special symbol of the predetermined second number of times that is greater than the first number of times is completed. For example, if the jackpot is A, the main control unit 401 plays a game in the electric support game state after the jackpot game until the variation display of the special symbol for 10 rotations (corresponding to the first number of times) is completed. If the jackpot is B or C, the game is played in the electric support game state until the special symbol variation display for 20 or 30 turns (corresponding to the third number of times) is finished after the jackpot game. Control.

  The production control unit 403 performs the production in the probability variation mode after the number of times of the special symbol variation display after the jackpot game exceeds the predetermined number of times (10th, 20th or 30th), and the variation of the special symbol after the jackpot game. There are times when the production is performed in the probability variation mode before the number of times of display exceeds a predetermined number of times (10th, 20th or 30th). For example, when the jackpot is special C, the production control unit 403 performs the production in the probability variation mode after the number of times of the special symbol variation display after the big hit game exceeds 30th, and the jackpot is special A, special B or In the case of special D, the effect is performed in the probability change mode before the number of times of the special symbol change display after the big hit game exceeds the 30th.

  The normal loss variation time and reach probability shown in FIG. 18 will be described later, and the contents of the effects in the branch effect mode will be described first.

<< Branch production >>
When the special A, special B, special C, A, B, or C jackpot is won, and the number of changes in the special symbol after the jackpot game due to the jackpot is a predetermined reference number, the production control unit 403 Performs a branch effect in the branch effect mode. In other words, the number of changes in the special symbol after the jackpot game refers to the number of changes in the special symbol calculated from the end of the jackpot game. For example, when the reference number is 10, “the branch effect is performed when the number of changes of the special symbol after the jackpot game is a predetermined reference number” means “when the special symbol changes after the jackpot game for the tenth time. It means “branch production”.

  FIG. 22A is a diagram illustrating the execution period of the branch effect. The execution period of the branch effect is the whole or one of the change period of the special symbol in the reference number (more specifically, the change display period of the special symbol when the number of changes of the special symbol after the jackpot game matches the reference number). Part. In FIG. 22, as an example, the execution period of the branch effect coincides with the entire variation period of the special symbol in the reference number. The reference number is “10” as the first reference number, “20” as the second reference number, or “30” as the third reference number. The first, second, and third reference numbers coincide with the values of the number of times that electric support is provided for communication A, communication B, and communication C, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 22B, the branch effects include a three-choice branch effect and a two-choice branch effect. When the special A, special B, special C, tsu A, tsu B or tsu C jackpot is won, and the number of changes in the special symbol after the jackpot game is the first or second reference number, the production control unit 403 Can execute a three-choice branch effect. In the case where a special C or big C jackpot is won, the production control unit 403 passes through a three-choice branch production for two times, and when the number of changes in the special symbol after the big jackpot game is the third reference number (30). Alternative branching can be executed.

  The branch effect includes a mode transition effect and a mode notification effect (see FIG. 22A), and the mode notification effect is executed after the mode change effect. The branch effect (particularly the mode notification effect) may be performed until the next change start time after the change of the special symbol in the reference number.

  The mode transition effect in the three-choice branch effect and the two-choice branch effect is particularly referred to as a three-choice mode transition effect and a two-choice mode transition effect, respectively.

  With reference to FIG. 23, the three-choice mode transition effect will be described. FIG. 23 shows an example of display contents of the image display unit 104 in the three-choice mode transition effect. In the three-choice mode transition effect of FIG. 23, the probability change mode transition suggestion area 1111 in which the character “RUSH rush” is shown, the chance mode continuation suggestion area 1112 in which the character “Continue Chance Time” is shown, and the character “Sorry” are shown. Operation of the roulette image 1110 including the reference mode transition suggestion area 1113, the character image 1121 indicating the characters “Stop to RUSH with a button push!”, The button image 1122 simulating the effect button 118, and the operation button 118 An effective period image 1123 indicating the effective period is displayed on the image display unit 104. Reference numeral 1124 represents a decorative pattern to be displayed in a variable manner. In the gaming machine 100, the game term “RUSH” corresponds to the probability variation mode, and the game term “chance time” corresponds to the chance mode.

  The effect control unit 403 sets all or part of the execution period of the three-choice mode transition effect as the operation effective period, and presses the character image 1121 and the button to prompt the player to press the effect button 118 within the operation effective period. The image 1122 and the effective period image 1123 are displayed on the image display unit 104, while the roulette effect by the roulette image 1110 is performed as a component of the three-choice mode transition effect.

  As shown in FIG. 24, in the roulette effect, for example, the brightness of one of the areas 1111 to 1113 on the image display unit 104 is set higher than the brightness of the remaining two areas, and the area where the brightness is increased is set as the area. It switches in order between 1111 to 1113.

  The effect control unit 403 sets any one of the areas 1111 to 1113 as the roulette stop area. When it is detected that the effect button 118 has been pressed within the operation effective period, the roulette stop area is fixedly highlighted. When the effect button 118 is not pressed within the operation effective period, the effect control unit 403 performs fixed highlight display of the roulette stop area after the operation effective period expires. The fixed highlight display of the roulette stop area refers to, for example, setting the brightness of the roulette stop area higher than the remaining two areas among the areas 1111 to 1113 and maintaining the set state for a predetermined time or more.

  Referring to FIGS. 25A to 25C, the fixed highlight display of the roulette stop area corresponds to the mode notification effect in the three-choice branch effect. The fixed highlight display of the roulette stop area in which the probability change mode transition suggestion area 1111 is set as the roulette stop area is a first mode notification effect that suggests that the target effect mode shifts to the probability change mode in the next change of the special symbol. The fixed highlight display of the roulette stop area in which the chance mode continuation suggestion area 1112 is set as the roulette stop area indicates that the game in the chance mode maintained after the jackpot game (the state where the target effect mode is set to the chance mode) is displayed. This is the second mode notification effect that suggests that the next change of the special symbol is continued (that is, the target effect mode is set to the chance mode also in the next change of the special symbol). The fixed highlight display of the roulette stop area in which the reference mode transition suggestion area 1113 is set as the roulette stop area indicates that the game in the chance mode maintained after the jackpot game (the state where the target effect mode is set to the chance mode) is displayed. This is the third mode notification effect that suggests that the next change of the special symbol does not continue and that the target effect mode shifts to the reference mode in the next change of the special symbol.

  As described above, the mode notification effect in the three-choice branch effect suggests whether the target effect mode after the three-choice branch effect is the probability variation mode, the chance mode, or the reference mode. It can be said that the roulette effect as a three-choice mode transition effect corresponds to a precursor effect suggesting that either the first or third mode notification effect may be performed.

  With reference to FIG. 26 (also see FIG. 23), the flow of effects after the end of the jackpot game 1151 of the jackpot 1150 will be described. The jackpot 1150 is a jackpot of Special A, Special B, Special C, A, B, or C. In the three-choice branch effect when the number of changes of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game 1151 due to the jackpot 1150 is the first reference number (10), the roulette stop area is a probabilistic mode if the jackpot 1150 is a special A. If it is set in the transition suggestion area 1111 and the jackpot 1150 is special B, special C, pass B or pass C, it is set in the chance mode continuation suggestion area 1112. If the jackpot 1150 is pass A, the transition to the reference mode The suggestion area 1113 is set. In the three-choice branch effect when the number of changes of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game 1151 by the jackpot 1150 is the second reference number (20), the roulette stop area is a probabilistic mode if the jackpot 1150 is a special B. It is set to the transition suggestion area 1111. If the jackpot 1150 is a special C or pass C, it is set to the chance mode continuation suggestion area 1112. If the jackpot 1150 is a pass B, it is set to the reference mode transition suggestion area 1113. The Note that the meaning of the picture corresponding to the third reference number in FIG. 26 can be understood from the following description.

  The effect control unit 403 may change the display mode of the roulette image 1110 according to the type of the jackpot 1150, and may change the ratio of the sizes of the areas 1111 to 1113, for example. By changing the display mode of the roulette image 1110, it is possible to improve the fun of the game by giving a sense of expectation or anxiety to the probability change mode transition, the chance mode continuation, or the reference mode transition.

27A and 27B, more specifically, for example, the effect control unit 403 sets the normal roulette display in which the sizes of the regions 1111 to 1113 are equal to each other, and sets the size of the region 1111 to the region 1112. 1113 and the first enlarged roulette display that is larger than those of 1113, the second enlarged roulette display that makes the size of the region 1112 larger than those of the regions 1111 and 1113, and the size of the region 1113 of those of the regions 1111 and 1112 Any one of the third enlarged roulette displays that are larger than the above can be selectively performed. The probabilities of performing normal roulette display, first enlarged roulette display, second enlarged roulette display, and third enlarged roulette display are represented by RLTJ ₀ , RLTJ ₁ , RLTJ ₂ , and RLTJ _3, respectively. Each of the probabilities RLTJ ₀ , RLTJ ₁ , RLTJ ₂ and RLTJ ₃ is greater than 0 and less than 1.

The effect control unit 403 may determine whether to perform normal roulette display or first to third enlarged roulette display in the roulette effect by lottery with the probabilities RLTJ _{0 to} RLTJ ₃ . At this time, when the target effect mode at the time of the next change of the special symbol after the three-choice branch effect becomes the probability variation mode, it is better to increase the probability RLTJ ₁ from the probabilities RLTJ ₀ , RLTJ ₂ and RLTJ _{3 in the} roulette effect. In the chance mode, the probability RLTJ ₂ in the roulette effect is better than the probabilities RLTJ ₀ , RLTJ _1, and RLTJ _{3. In} the reference mode, the probability RLTJ _{3 is set} to the probabilities RLTJ ₀ , RLTJ ₁ and it may increase than RLTJ _2.

  In addition, in the judgment per special figure when the number of changes of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game 1151 by the jackpot 1150 is the first or second reference number, if the jackpot is won, It is recommended to produce an effect that shows the winning of the jackpot. That is, in this case, for example, after performing the third mode notification effect shown in FIG. 25 (c) in the three-choice branch effect, it is special in a mode showing a big win through execution of a predetermined revival effect or the like. It is good to stop and display a design and a decoration design.

  With reference to FIG. 28, the two-choice branch effect will be described. On the left side of FIG. 28, an example of display contents of the image display unit 104 in the two-choice mode transition effect that forms the two-choice branch effect is shown. In the two-choice mode transition effect shown in FIG. 28, a door image 1210 that imitates a double-open door, a character image 1221 that indicates the characters “Open the door with button hits!”, And a button image that imitates an effect button 118 1222 and an effective period image 1223 indicating the operation effective period of the effect button 118 are displayed on the image display unit 104. Reference numeral 1224 represents a decorative symbol displayed in a variable manner.

  The effect control unit 403 sets all or a part of the execution period of the two-choice mode transition effect as the operation effective period, and presses the character image 1221 and the button to prompt the player to press the effect button 118 within the operation effective period. The image 1222 and the valid period image 1223 are displayed on the image display unit 104, while the door opening curl effect by the door image 1210 is performed as a component of the two-choice mode transition curl effect. The door opening effect is an effect in which the door in the door image 1210 gradually opens according to the number of times the effect button 118 is pressed within the operation effective period. However, whether or not the door in the door image 1210 is completely opened is determined only by the type of jackpot 1150 regardless of the number of times the effect button 118 is pressed.

  In the two-choice branch effect when the number of changes of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game 1151 by the jackpot 1150 is the third reference number (30), if the jackpot 1150 is a special C, the door in the door image 1210 While the fourth mode notification effect that is completely opened is executed, if the jackpot 1150 is C, the fifth mode notification effect that the door in the door image 1210 is finally closed without being completely opened. Is executed.

  The fourth mode notification effect in which the door in the door image 1210 is completely opened suggests that the target effect mode shifts to the probability change mode in the next change of the special symbol (that is, the jackpot 1150 is special C). ing. In the fifth mode notification effect that the door in the door image 1210 is finally opened without being completely opened, the target effect mode shifts to the reference mode in the next variation of the special symbol (that is, the jackpot 1150 is C). Suggests).

  As described above, the mode notification effect in the two-choice branch effect suggests whether the target effect mode after the two-choice branch effect is the probability variation mode or the reference mode. It can be said that the door opening curl effect as the two-choice mode transition curl effect corresponds to the sign effect that suggests that the fourth or fifth mode notification effect may be performed.

  The effect control unit 403 may change the display mode of the door image 1210 according to the type of jackpot 1150. For example, the color or pattern of the door image 1210 may be changed. By changing the display mode of the door image 1210, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving a sense of expectation to the probability change mode transition or anxiety to the standard mode transition.

Referring to FIGS. 29A and 29B, more specifically, for example, the effect control unit 403 changes the door color of the door image 1210 and the door color of the door image 1210. The red door display to be red can be selectively performed. The probabilities of performing white door display and red door display are represented by DOORJ ₁ and DOORJ _2, respectively. Each of the probabilities DOORJ ₁ and DOORJ ₂ is greater than 0 and less than 1.

The effect control unit 403 may determine whether to perform the white door display or the white door display by lottery based on the probabilities DOORJ ₁ and DOORJ ₂ in the door opening effect. At this time, if the target effect mode at the time of the next change of the special symbol after the two-choice branch effect becomes the probability change mode, the probability DOORJ ₂ should be higher than the probability DOORJ ₁ in the door opening effect, and the reference mode and In this case, the probability DOORJ ₁ should be higher than the probability DOORJ ₂ in the door opening effect. Depending on the type of jackpot 1150, the display mode of the door image 1210 may be changed to three or more types.

  In addition, in the determination per special figure when the number of changes of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game 1151 by the jackpot 1150 is the third reference number, if the jackpot is won, the jackpot winning after the two-choice branch effect It is recommended to produce an effect that indicates. That is, in this case, for example, after performing the fifth mode notification effect that closes the door of the door image 1210 in the two-choice branch effect, the special win mode is displayed in a manner that indicates the winning of the big win through execution of a predetermined revival effect or the like. It is good to stop and display a design and a decoration design.

  If you win a jackpot of Special A, Special B, Special C, Tsu A, Tsu B or Tsu C, the type of jackpot is Special A, Special at the stage where the number of changes in the special symbol after the jackpot game is 1 to 10 rotations. The player cannot determine whether it was B, special C, communication A, communication B, or communication C by simply looking at the image display unit 104. In addition, if you win a special jackpot of Special B, Special C, B or B or C, the type of jackpot will be Special B, Special C or B The player cannot discriminate whether or not it has been C or C only by looking at the image display unit 104. In the special symbol change just before the type of jackpot is revealed, by performing the three-choice branch effect as described above, the expectation for entering the probability change mode or continuing the chance mode and anxiety about shifting to the standard mode A feeling can be strongly given to the player, and the interest of the game is improved.

  When winning a special jackpot or special C jackpot, at the stage where the number of changes in the special symbol after the jackpot game is 1 to 30 rotations, It is impossible or difficult to discriminate only by looking at the image display unit 104. In the special symbol change immediately before the type of jackpot is revealed, by performing the two-choice branching effect as described above, the player is expected to enter the probability change mode and feel uneasy about entering the standard mode. It is possible to hold the game strongly and improve the fun of the game.

  As shown in FIG. 19 and FIG. 20 and the like, the ratio that the jackpot becomes special A, special B, and special C are all 5%, whereas the ratio that jackpot becomes a total A: 7 % Is higher than the ratio of jackpot to B: 6%, the ratio of jackpot to B: 6% is the ratio of jackpot to C: 5%. As a result, after the 4R jackpot game, as the game in the chance mode continues, the ratio that the game state is the high probability game state increases. After the 4R jackpot game is over, the ratio of the game state being the high probability game state is “(5% + 5% + 5%) / {(5% + 5% + 5) in the portion where the number of changes in the special symbol is 1-10 times. %) + (7% + 6% + 5%)} ≈45% ”is expressed by about 45%, but when the chance mode continues in the portion where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 11 to 20,“ (5% + 5%) / {(5% + 5%) + (6% + 5%)} ≈48% ”, which is represented by about 48%, and the chance mode is in the part where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 21-30 times This is because if it continues, it is expressed as 50% from “5% / (5% + 5%) ≈50%”. By introducing a mechanism in which the proportion of the gaming state being the high probability gaming state increases as the game in the chance mode continues, the player's expectation for the high probability gaming state is gradually increased. You can go and the fun of the game will increase. Of course, the specific figures relating to the above-mentioned ratios are only examples, and the ratios where the jackpot becomes special A, special B, special C, general A, general B, general C, for example, 7%, 7%, 7%, This tendency is further strengthened by setting 6%, 4% and 2%.

  The three-choice branch effect is arbitrary as long as the target effect mode after the three-choice branch effect is an effect including an indication as to which of the probability change mode, the chance mode, and the reference mode. For example, a mini game using the effect button 118 is performed in the three-choice branch effect, and whether the target effect mode after the three-choice branch effect is the probability change mode, the chance mode, or the reference mode according to the result of the mini game. Suggestion may be performed, or a three-choice branch effect may be performed without accepting an operation on the effect button 118.

  Further, for example, a three-choice branch effect may be configured using a combination of the first door opening effect and the second door opening effect.

  Referring to FIG. 30, specifically, for example, in the three-choice branch effect when the number of changes of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game 1151 by the jackpot 1150 is the first reference number (10), the effect control unit 403 First, the first door opening turning effect similar to the door opening turning effect described above for the two-choice branching effect is performed, and only when the door on the door image 1210 is completely opened by the first door opening turning effect. A two-door opening effect is performed. At this time, the door on the door image 1210 in the first door opening effect is completely opened if the jackpot 1150 is special A, special B, special C, pass B or special C, but the jackpot 1150 is If it is through A, it is closed completely without being completely opened. The door on the door image 1210 in the second door opening effect is completely opened if the jackpot 1150 is special A, but if the jackpot 1150 is special B, special C, pass B or special C. For example, it is closed completely without being completely opened. A three-choice branch effect with the second reference number can be similarly performed.

  The two-choice branch effect is arbitrary as long as the target effect mode after the two-choice branch effect is an effect including an indication of whether the target effect mode is the probability variation mode or the reference mode. For example, a mini-game using the effect button 118 is performed in the two-choice branch effect, and an indication as to whether the target effect mode after the two-choice branch effect is the probability change mode or the reference mode is made according to the result of the mini-game. Alternatively, a two-choice branch effect may be performed without accepting an operation on the effect button 118.

<< About the changing time of each production mode >>
Reference is again made to FIG. Specific fluctuation times when the target effect mode is the chance mode, the branch effect mode, the probability change mode, the reference mode, and the latent mode are represented by symbols tHHa, tHHb, tHHc, tHHd, and tHHe, respectively. The fluctuation times tHHa, tHHb, tHHc, tHHd, and tHHe are determined from the special figure fluctuation pattern tables THt_a, THt_b, THt_c, THt_d, and THt_e, respectively.

  Here, it is assumed that the specific variation time is a normal loss variation time. The normal loss variation time is the special symbol variation time when the result of the judgment per special figure is “losing” (that is, not winning the big win), and the normal effect is not performed. This is the variation time of the special symbol when the loss effect is executed. In each effect mode, when the result of determination per special figure is “lost”, one of the one or more lost effects indicating that the result of determination per special figure is “lost” is selectively selected. Executed. In each effect mode, the normal lose effect is a lose effect that is executed with the highest probability when the result of the determination per special figure is “lost”.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 18, it is assumed that the fluctuation times tHHa, tHHb, tHHc, tHHd, and tHHe are 3 seconds, 10 seconds, 2 seconds, 13.5 seconds, and 13.5 seconds, respectively. Although the specific numerical values of the fluctuation times tHHa, tHHb, tHHc, tHHd, and tHHe shown here can be changed as appropriate, it is preferable that the following conditions are satisfied.

  The variation time tHHa related to the chance mode is preferably longer than the variation time tHHc related to the probability variation mode, and is preferably shorter than the variation time tHHd related to the reference mode. Since the electronic support is given in the probability variation mode, the player often prefers to execute the big hit lottery at a high speed in order to realize a speedy game. As in the chance mode, the power support is given in the same way as the probability change mode, so the realization of speedy games is preferred. Therefore, “tHHa <tHHd” and “tHHc <tHHd” are preferable. However, because the number of times the special symbol changes in the chance mode is very limited, if the special symbol change time is too short, the staying time in the chance mode will be too short and the player will enjoy the game in the chance mode. It becomes difficult to do. Therefore, it is preferable to satisfy “tHHc <tHHa”.

  The variation time tHHb related to the branch effect mode is preferably longer than the variation time tHHa related to the chance mode. In the branch effect mode, the result of determination per special figure other than “big hit” is always “normal lose”. That is, in the branch effect mode, unless the determination target TT has won a jackpot, the variation time of the special symbol is time tHHb. The branch effect in the branch effect mode is a particularly important effect for the player that suggests what effect mode the effect mode becomes after the next change. Executing such an effect over a relatively long time can effectively increase the player's expectation and the like. Therefore, “tHHa <tHHb” is preferable.

  In the example of FIG. 18, the fluctuation time tHHd is longer than the fluctuation time tHHb, but the opposite may be possible, or they may be matched. In the example of FIG. 18, the fluctuation time tHHd and the fluctuation time tHHe coincide with each other, but one of them may be longer than the other.

  FIG. 31 shows an example of the chance mode special figure variation pattern table THt_a (see FIG. 7). The special mode fluctuation pattern table THt_a for chance mode includes a special figure fluctuation pattern table THt_a1 for loss and a special figure fluctuation pattern table THt_a2 for jackpot.

  The tables THt_a1 and THt_a2 are tables in which predetermined determination values are associated with the special figure variation patterns THp_a11 to THp_a13. The special figure fluctuation pattern THp_a11 is a special figure fluctuation pattern in which a normal loss effect is performed, and the special figure fluctuation patterns THp_a12 and THp_a13 are special figure fluctuation patterns in which a reach effect is performed. The special symbol fluctuation times in the special figure fluctuation patterns THp_a11 to THp_a13 are 3 seconds, 30 seconds, and 40 seconds, respectively. The fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation pattern THp_a11 corresponds to the fluctuation time tHHa.

  In the chance mode in which the table THt_a is used for selecting the special figure variation pattern, the CPU 411 selects the table THt_a1 when the determination result of the special figure determination is lost, while the determination result of the special figure determination is the big hit For this, the table THt_a2 is selected. The CPU 411 corresponds to the determination target TT when the special figure fluctuation pattern random number of the determination target TT matches the determination value associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern THp_ai in the selection table (here, THt_a1 or THt_a2). The special figure fluctuation pattern THp_ai is selected and set as the special figure fluctuation pattern to be performed (where i is an integer of 11 to 13). When the special figure variation pattern THp_a11 is selected and set for the determination target TT, the effect control unit 403 executes a normal lose effect in the chance mode.

  In the table THt_a1, a total of 450 judgment values “0 to 449” and a total of 50 judgment values “450 to 499” are assigned to the special figure variation patterns THp_a11 and THp_a12 (each judgment value is an integer). ), No special value is assigned to the special figure variation pattern THp_a13. Therefore, when the determination per special figure of the determination target TT indicates “losing” in the chance mode, the variation time of the special symbol when the determination result is displayed is likely to be the variation time tHHa of the special diagram variation pattern THp_a11 (variation time). tHHa has the highest probability). In the table THt_a2, a total of 500 judgment values “0 to 499” are assigned to the special figure fluctuation pattern THp_a13, and no judgment values are assigned to the special figure fluctuation patterns THp_a11 and THp_a12. As described above, the special figure fluctuation pattern random number is an integer value of 0 or more and 499 or less.

  FIG. 32 shows an example of the special effect variation pattern table THt_b (see FIG. 7) for the branch effect mode. The branching effect mode special figure fluctuation pattern table THt_b includes a special figure fluctuation pattern table THt_b1 for loss and a special figure fluctuation pattern table THt_b2 for jackpot.

  The tables THt_b1 and THt_b2 are tables in which predetermined determination values are associated with the special figure variation patterns THp_b11 and THp_b12. The special figure fluctuation pattern THp_b11 is a special figure fluctuation pattern in which a normal loss effect is performed, and the special figure fluctuation pattern THp_b12 is a special figure fluctuation pattern in which a predetermined revival effect is performed without a reach effect. The special symbol fluctuation times in the special figure fluctuation patterns THp_b11 and THp_b12 are 10 seconds and 30 seconds, respectively. The fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation pattern THp_b11 corresponds to the fluctuation time tHHb.

  In the branch effect mode in which the table THt_b is used for selecting the special figure variation pattern, the CPU 411 selects the table THt_b1 when the determination result of the special figure determination is lost, while the determination result of the special figure determination is the big hit. In this case, the table THt_b2 is selected. Then, the CPU 411 corresponds to the determination target TT when the special figure fluctuation pattern random number of the determination target TT matches the determination value associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern THp_bi in the selection table (here, THt_b1 or THt_b2). The special figure fluctuation pattern THp_bi is selected and set as the special figure fluctuation pattern to be performed (where i is an integer from 11 to 12). When the special figure variation pattern THp_b11 is selected and set for the determination target TT, the effect control unit 403 executes the normal lose effect in the branch effect mode. The normal loss effect in the branch effect mode corresponds to the above-described branch effect (three-choice branch effect or two-choice branch effect).

  In the table THt_b1, a total of 500 judgment values “0 to 499” are assigned to the special figure fluctuation pattern THp_b11 (each judgment value is an integer), and no judgment value is assigned to the special figure fluctuation pattern THp_b12. In the table THt_b2, a total of 500 judgment values “0 to 499” are assigned to the special figure fluctuation pattern THp_b12, and no judgment value is assigned to the special figure fluctuation pattern THp_b11.

  FIG. 33 illustrates an example of the special variation mode special pattern variation pattern table THt_c (see FIG. 7). The probability variation mode special figure fluctuation pattern table THt_c includes a special figure fluctuation pattern table THt_c1 for loss and a special figure fluctuation pattern table THt_c2 for jackpot.

  The tables THt_c1 and THt_c2 are tables in which predetermined determination values are associated with the special figure variation patterns THp_c11 to THp_c13. The special figure fluctuation pattern THp_c11 is a special figure fluctuation pattern in which a normal loss effect is performed, and the special figure fluctuation patterns THp_c12 and THp_c13 are special figure fluctuation patterns in which a reach effect is performed. The special symbol fluctuation times in the special figure fluctuation patterns THp_c11 to THp_c13 are 2 seconds, 30 seconds, and 40 seconds, respectively. The fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation pattern THp_c11 corresponds to the fluctuation time tHHc.

  In the probability variation mode in which the table THt_c is used to select the special figure variation pattern, the CPU 411 selects the table THt_c1 when the judgment result of the special figure determination is lost, while the determination result of the special figure judgment is a big hit. For this, the table THt_c2 is selected. Then, the CPU 411 corresponds to the determination target TT when the special figure fluctuation pattern random number of the determination target TT matches the determination value associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern THp_ci in the selection table (here, THt_c1 or THt_c2). The special figure fluctuation pattern THp_ci is selected and set as the special figure fluctuation pattern (where i is an integer of 11 to 13). When the special figure variation pattern THp_c11 is selected and set for the determination target TT, the effect control unit 403 executes a normal lose effect in the probability variation mode.

  In the table THt_c1, a total of 483 judgment values “0 to 482” and a total of 17 judgment values “483 to 499” are assigned to the special figure variation patterns THp_c11 and THp_c12 (each judgment value is an integer). ), No special value is assigned to the special figure variation pattern THp_c13. Therefore, when the determination per special figure of the determination target TT indicates “losing” in the probability variation mode, the variation time of the special symbol when the determination result is indicated tends to be the variation time tHHc of the special diagram variation pattern THp_c11 (variation time). tHHc has the highest probability). In the table THt_c2, a total of 500 judgment values “0 to 499” are assigned to the special figure fluctuation pattern THp_c13, and no judgment values are assigned to the special figure fluctuation patterns THp_c11 and THp_c12.

  FIG. 34 shows an example of the special mode fluctuation pattern table THt_e (see FIG. 7) for the latent mode. The latent mode special figure fluctuation pattern table THt_e includes a loss special figure fluctuation pattern table THt_e1 and a jackpot special figure fluctuation pattern table THt_e2.

  The tables THt_e1 and THt_e2 are tables in which predetermined determination values are associated with the special figure variation patterns THp_e11 to THp_e13. The special figure fluctuation pattern THp_e11 is a special figure fluctuation pattern in which a normal loss effect is performed, and the special figure fluctuation patterns THp_e12 and THp_e13 are special figure fluctuation patterns in which a reach effect is performed. The special symbol fluctuation times in the special figure fluctuation patterns THp_e11 to THp_e13 are 13.5 seconds, 40 seconds, and 50 seconds, respectively. The fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation pattern THp_e11 corresponds to the fluctuation time tHHe.

  In the latent mode in which the table THt_e is used to select the special figure variation pattern, the CPU 411 selects the table THt_e1 when the determination result of the special figure determination is lost, while the determination result of the special figure determination is a big hit. For this, the table THt_e2 is selected. The CPU 411 corresponds to the determination target TT when the special figure fluctuation pattern random number of the determination target TT matches the determination value associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern THp_ei in the selection table (here, THt_e1 or THt_e2). The special figure fluctuation pattern THp_ei is selected and set as the special figure fluctuation pattern to be performed (where i is an integer of 11 or more and 13 or less). When the special figure variation pattern THp_e11 is selected and set for the determination target TT, the effect control unit 403 executes a normal lose effect in the latent mode.

  In the table THt_e1, a total of 450 judgment values “0 to 449” and a total of 50 judgment values “450 to 499” are assigned to the special figure variation patterns THp_e11 and THp_e12 (each judgment value is an integer). ), No special value is assigned to the special figure variation pattern THp_e13. Therefore, when the determination per special figure of the determination target TT indicates “losing” in the latent mode, the variation time of the special symbol when the determination result is displayed tends to be the variation time tHHe of the special diagram variation pattern THp_e11 (variation time). tHHe has the highest probability). In the table THt_e2, a total of 500 judgment values “0 to 499” are assigned to the special figure fluctuation pattern THp_e13, and no judgment values are assigned to the special figure fluctuation patterns THp_e11 and THp_e12.

  Regarding the reference mode, the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation pattern THp_d11 shown in FIG. 8 corresponds to the fluctuation time tHHd. When the special figure variation pattern THp_d11 is selected and set for the determination target TT, the effect control unit 403 executes a normal lose effect (see FIG. 13) in the reference mode. When the determination per special figure of the determination target TT indicates “losing” in the reference mode, the variation time of the special symbol when indicating the determination result is likely to be the variation time tHHd of the special diagram variation pattern THp_d11 (the variation time tHHd Most likely).

  Thus, when the determination per special figure of the determination target TT indicates “losing”, in the chance mode, the branching effect mode, the probability variation mode, the reference mode, and the latent mode, the variation time of the special symbol is the variation time tHHa, It is easy to determine tHHb, tHHc, tHHd, and tHHe. Even in high-probability gaming state, the probability that the hit per special figure will be a jackpot is about 1/40, so even if the possibility of jackpot occurrence is taken into account, the chance mode, branch effect mode, probability change mode, reference mode, In the latent mode (that is, when the tables THt_a, THt_b, THt_c, THt_d, and THt_e are used as the target special figure variation pattern table), the variation times of the special symbols are the variation times tHHa, tHHb, tHHc, It is easy to determine tHHd and tHHe.

 For example, “the variation time of the special symbol is easy to be determined as a specific variation time in an arbitrary production mode (chance mode, branch production mode, probability variation mode or reference mode, latent mode)” The special symbol variation time is determined as one of a plurality of candidate variation times (including a specific variation time as one candidate variation time, for example, THp_a11 to a13 of 3 seconds, 30 seconds, or 40 seconds in the chance mode). This means that the variation time of the special symbol has the highest probability of becoming a specific variation time among a plurality of candidate variation times (for example, higher than 50%). The probability that the variation time of a special symbol is determined to be a specific variation time in Higher than the probability of being determined to a constant fluctuation time (may be 0%) "it may mean.

<< About reach probability of each production mode >>
Reference is again made to FIG. Reach probabilities when the target effect mode is the chance mode, the branch effect mode, the probability change mode, the reference mode, and the latent mode are represented by symbols RKRa, RKRb, RKRc, RKRd, and RKRe, respectively. The reach probability refers to the probability that the reach effect is executed when the result of the determination per special figure is “losing” (that is, the jackpot is not won).

  In the chance mode, when the result of the determination per special figure is “losing”, the reach effect is executed when the special figure fluctuation pattern random number of the determination target TT is an integer within “450 to 499” (see FIG. 31). ). As described above, the special figure variation pattern random number is an integer value of 0 or more and 499 or less. Therefore, the reach probability RKRa in the chance mode is 1/10 from “50/500 = 1/10”.

  Similarly, the reach probability RKRc in the probability variation mode is “17/500”, that is, about 1/30 (see FIG. 33). Similarly, the reach probability RKRe in the latent mode is 1/10 from “50/500 = 1/10” (see FIG. 34).

  The same applies to the reference mode. In the reference mode, when the result of the determination per special figure is “losing”, the reach effect is executed when the special figure fluctuation pattern random number is an integer within “475 to 499” (see FIGS. 8 and 13). . Therefore, the reach probability RKRd in the reference mode is 1/20 from “25/500 = 1/20”.

  On the other hand, since the reach effect is not performed in the branch effect mode, the reach probability RKRb is zero. In the branch effect mode, the execution of the branch effect concentrates the player's attention on the continuation of the chance mode or the transition to the probability change mode. Therefore, the execution of the reach effect that does not lead to a big hit loses the significance of the branch effect mode. I will reject it. Therefore, the reach effect is not performed in the branch effect mode. If a jackpot is won in the branch effect mode, a jackpot notice is given after a branch effect via a predetermined revival effect.

  Although the specific numerical value of the reach probability of each production mode can be changed as appropriate, it is preferable that the following conditions are satisfied.

  The reach probability RKRa in the chance mode may be set higher than the reach probability RKRd in the reference mode. The chance mode is a production mode that has the possibility that the current gaming state is a high-probability gaming state, so that a player may expect a big win relatively early in the hope of being a high-probability gaming state. I expect it. By setting the reach probability RKRa relatively high so as to respond to this, it is possible to increase the player's expectation.

  The reach probability RKRc in the probability variation mode may be set lower than the reach probability RKRa in the chance mode. Probability mode is a production mode that corresponds to the current gaming state being a high probability gaming state, and the player's attention is directed to the type of the next jackpot rather than when the next jackpot will occur. It is done. Therefore, the frequent occurrence of reach production that does not lead to a jackpot is not so much favored by the player. Therefore, “RKRc <RKRa” is preferable. From the same viewpoint, “RKRc <RKRd” and “RKRc <RKRe” are preferable.

  The reach probability RKRe in the latent mode may be higher than the reach probability RKRd in the reference mode. Since the latent mode is a production mode that has the possibility that the current gaming state is a high-probability gaming state, the player may not be able to hit the jackpot relatively early in anticipation of the high-probability gaming state. I expect it. By setting the reach probability RKRe to be relatively high so as to respond to this, it is possible to increase the player's expectation.

  In addition, when the above-described gaming machine 100 is won by a special jackpot of special A to special G, it belongs to a loop machine in which the high probability gaming state is completely or substantially maintained until the next big jackpot is won. However, the gaming machine 100 may be formed as a so-called ST machine.

  In this case, after the jackpot game with the special A to G jackpot ends, the game is only performed while the special symbol is changed for the predetermined number of STs (that is, until the jackpot lottery for the predetermined number of STs is performed). The gaming state of the machine 100 is maintained in a high probability gaming state, and if the next jackpot is not won by the completion of the variation of the special symbol for the predetermined number of STs, the gaming machine 100 will be in the next variation of the special symbol. The gaming state is changed from the high probability gaming state to the low probability gaming state.

  The number of STs may be any number as long as it is an integer equal to or greater than 1. However, it is desirable that the number of STs is greater than at least 30 in the gaming machine 100 in which the number of times of passing C support is 30. Actually, for example, the number of STs is an integer that is two times or less or three times or less the reciprocal of the jackpot winning probability (10/399 in the example of FIG. 5) in the high probability gaming state.

<< Consideration of Invention Regarding Basic Embodiment >>
The invention relating to the basic embodiment will be considered.

The gaming machine W _{0A according} to one aspect of the basic embodiment has a determination unit that determines whether or not a special game advantageous to the player is performed when the start condition is satisfied, and the design varies based on the determination result. Determining means for determining a variation time to be displayed; and symbol display control means for stopping and displaying the symbol in a manner indicating the result of the determination after the variation time has elapsed since the symbol display means started the variation display of the symbol. When the determination means determines that the special game is to be performed, it is determined that the special game is executed by the determination means after the execution of the special game and the special game execution means that executes the special game. Probability control means for controlling the probability to be a predetermined low probability or a predetermined high probability higher than the low probability, and until the predetermined number of times of the change display of the symbol is finished while being controlled to the low probability The game can be controlled in an auxiliary game state (for example, the electric support game state) in which the start condition is easily satisfied, and even if the predetermined number of times of the variation display of the symbol is finished when the control is performed with the high probability, An auxiliary game control means that allows the game to be continuously controlled in the auxiliary game state, and the determination means is controlled with the low probability and when the game is controlled in the auxiliary game state, The variation time is determined by a first determination condition (for example, THt_a) in which a first variation time (for example, 3 seconds) that is shorter than usual is easily determined when the number of variations of the symbol display is less than the predetermined number of times, First determination means capable of determining a second variation time (for example, 10 seconds) longer than the first variation time when the number of symbol variation displays is the predetermined number of times; Game When the game is controlled in the state, the first determination time (for example, THt_a) in which the first variation time (for example, 3 seconds) can be easily determined when the number of times of display of the variation of the symbol is less than the predetermined number of times. ), The second variation time (for example, 10 seconds) can be determined when the number of times the symbol is displayed is the predetermined number of times, and the number of times the symbol is displayed is the predetermined number of times. Second determination means for determining the variation time under a third determination condition (for example, THt_c) in which a third variation time (for example, 2 seconds) shorter than the first variation time is easily determined when the eyes are exceeded. It is characterized by having.

In the auxiliary game state, the starting condition is likely to be satisfied, so that it is easy to favor speedy game progression by shortening the time for changing the symbol. In the gaming machine _WOA , since the first variation time that is shorter than usual is easily determined by the first or second determination condition in the auxiliary game state, it is possible to realize speedy game progression.
On the other hand, since the gaming state can change after the predetermined number of times, the player is particularly interested in the variation of the symbols at the predetermined number of times. Considering this, the gaming machine _WOA can determine the second variation time rather than the first variation time at the predetermined number of times. As a result, the player's sense of expectation for high-probability control, anxiety about low-probability control, or the like can be expressed effectively, and the interest of the game can be improved.
In addition, in the high probability control and the auxiliary game state, if the predetermined number of times as a branch point is exceeded, the third variation time that is shorter than the first variation time is easily determined, so that speedy game progress is further promoted. . Conversely, if it is less than the predetermined number of times, the symbol is likely to fluctuate in the first variation time longer than the third variation time, so the game time until the less than the predetermined number of times (although the game progresses to a certain degree, An interesting game time in which expectation and anxiety are controlled with high probability or low probability are not shortened too much, and the balance is achieved and the progress of the game is realized.

In addition, for example, the gaming machine W _0A may further include an effect control unit that performs an effect when the game is controlled in the auxiliary game state, and the effect control unit is controlled with the high probability and When the game is controlled in the auxiliary game state, and when the number of times of the variable display of the symbol exceeds the predetermined number of times, a specific effect mode (which indicates that the control is performed with high probability ( For example, when the game is controlled in the auxiliary game state with the specific effect mode control means for performing the effect in the probability variation mode, the number of times of the variable display of the symbol is the predetermined number of times. Even if there is a suggestion effect control means for performing an suggestion effect (for example, a mode notification effect; see FIG. 22A, etc.) that suggests that the effect is performed in the specific effect mode. good.

  Thereby, the player can enjoy the effect at the predetermined number of times with a sense of expectation that the suggestion effect will be executed. The state in which the player is attracted to the production corresponds to a state in which the game is sufficiently enjoyed.

Further, for example, in the gaming machine W _0A , the effect control means is controlled with the low probability or the high probability and when the game is controlled in the auxiliary gaming state, and the number of the variable display of the symbol May have a sign effect control means for performing a sign effect (for example, a mode transition effect; see FIG. 22 (a), etc.) that suggests the possibility that the suggest effect is performed at the predetermined number of times. The suggestion effect control means may be capable of performing the sign effect before performing the suggestion effect.

  With the sign production, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation that the suggestion production will be executed.

A description of the gaming machine _W0A will be supplemented. Determining means in the gaming machine W _0A, determining means, the symbol display control means, special game execution means, the probability control means and the auxiliary game control means, in the gaming machine 100 is realized by the main control unit 401 for example (however, the symbol If it is regarded as a decorative symbol, the symbol display control means is realized by the effect control unit 403). The effect control means in the gaming machine _WOA is realized by the effect control unit 403 in the gaming machine 100, for example. The symbol in the gaming machine W _0A may be considered as a special symbol, or may be considered as a decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol, but in the following, for the sake of concrete explanation, the symbol in the gaming machine W _0A Considering that the symbol is a special symbol, the explanation of the gaming machine _W0A will be supplemented.

  Special games include games that involve opening a special prize opening. The special prize opening may be the big prize opening 109, and thus the special game may be a game (for example, a big hit game) with the opening of the big prize opening 109. In this case, the determination in the determination means includes determination per special figure, and may further include special symbol determination and special pattern fluctuation pattern determination.

  “Controlled with low probability” means, for example, that after the execution of a special game, the probability that a new special game is determined to be newly controlled is controlled by the probability control means. Similarly, “control with high probability” means that, for example, after execution of a special game, the probability that a new special game is determined to be performed is controlled with high probability by the probability control means. The auxiliary game state corresponds to, for example, the electric support game state. The gaming machine can also control the game in a non-auxiliary game state (for example, a non-electric support game state) in which the start condition is difficult to be established in comparison with the auxiliary game state. The “number of times of display of the symbol change” when the low probability or the high probability is controlled may be interpreted as referring to “the number of times of display of the symbol change” calculated from the end of the special game. .

  The determining means in the control unit 401 determines the variation time for variably displaying the special symbol based on the result of the special symbol processing.

  The first determining means embodied in the example of the basic embodiment is when the game is controlled in the low probability electric support game state, and the number of changes of the special symbol after the jackpot game is a predetermined reference number ( For example, when the time is less than 10), the special symbol variation time is determined under the first determination condition in which the first variation time (tHHa; 3 seconds) that is shorter than usual is easily determined. When the reference number matches, the second variation time (tHHb; 10 seconds) longer than the first variation time (tHHa; 3 seconds) can be determined as the variation time of the special symbol.

  The second determining means embodied in the example of the basic embodiment is when the game is controlled in the high probability electric support game state, and the number of changes of the special symbol after the jackpot game is a predetermined reference number ( For example, when the time is less than 10), the variation time of the special symbol is determined under the second determination condition in which the first variation time (tHHa; 3 seconds) is easily determined, and the variation number of the special symbol after the jackpot game is the reference number. The second variation time (tHHb; 10 seconds) can be determined as the variation time of the special symbol when they match, and the first variation time (tHHa) when the number of variations of the special symbol after the jackpot game exceeds the reference number The variation time of the special symbol can be determined under a third determination condition in which a third variation time (tHHc; 2 seconds) shorter than 3 seconds) is easily determined.

  In the basic embodiment, “normal” compared with the first fluctuation time (fluctuation time tHHa) may be considered to indicate the fluctuation time tHHd (13.5 seconds). For example, in the reference mode, when the determination per special figure is “lost”, the variation time of the special symbol of the determination target TT is a plurality of variation times defined in the special figure variation pattern table THt_d1 for loss in FIG. However, the variation time determined with the highest probability among the plurality of variation times may be considered to be the “normal” variation time (tHHd).

  Regarding the first or second determination condition, “the first variation time (for example, the variation time tHHa; 3 seconds) is easily determined” means, for example, a plurality of candidate variation times including the first variation time as one candidate variation time. Can be determined as the variation time of the special symbol. Among the plurality of candidate variation times, the first variation time has the highest probability of being determined as the variation time of the special symbol (for example, 50%). Higher). Alternatively, with respect to the first or second determination condition, “when the number of times the symbol variation is displayed is less than the predetermined number of times, the first variation time is easily determined” means that “the number of times the symbol variation is displayed is In comparison with “when the predetermined number of times is displayed” and “when the number of times of the variable display of the symbol exceeds the predetermined number of times”, “when the number of times of variable display of the symbol is less than the predetermined number of times” It may mean that the probability that the variation time is determined is relatively high.

  Regarding the third determination condition, “the third variation time (for example, the variation time tHHc; 2 seconds) is easily determined” means, for example, any one of a plurality of candidate variation times including the third variation time as one candidate variation time. Can be determined as the variation time of the special symbol, but among the plurality of candidate variation times, the third variation time is most likely to be determined as the variation time of the special symbol (for example, higher than 50%). It may mean that. Alternatively, regarding the third determination condition, “when the number of times of display of the symbol variation exceeds the predetermined number of times, the third variation time is easy to be determined” means that “the number of times of symbol variation display is the predetermined number of times. In comparison with “when less than the number of times” and “when the number of times of the variable display of the symbol is the predetermined number of times”, “and when“ the number of times of the variable display of the symbol exceeds the predetermined number of times ” It may mean that the probability that the three variation times are determined is relatively high.

  In the basic embodiment, the first and second determination conditions correspond to the determination time of the variation time using the chance mode special figure variation pattern table THt_a of FIG. 31, and the third determination condition is for the probability variation mode of FIG. This corresponds to the condition for determining the variation time using the special figure variation pattern table THt_c. Therefore, in the basic embodiment, the first and second determination conditions are the same as each other. However, in the present invention, the first and second determination conditions may be different from each other.

  For example, different first and second chance mode special figure variation pattern tables may be prepared as the chance mode special figure variation pattern table THt_a. After the special A, special B or special C jackpot game, when the table THt_a is to be used, the special figure fluctuation pattern is selected using the first chance mode special figure fluctuation pattern table, and After the big hit game of A, B, or C, when the table THt_a is to be used, the special figure fluctuation pattern may be selected using the second chance mode special figure fluctuation pattern table. Thereby, the first and second determination conditions are different from each other.

  More specifically, for example, the first chance mode special figure variation pattern table is the table THt_a itself of FIG. 31, while in the loss table THt_a1 of the table THt_a of FIG. 31, the special figure fluctuation patterns THp_a11 and THp_a12 are changed. The special figure fluctuation pattern table obtained by changing the assigned determination values to “0 to 450” and “451 to 499” is used as a second chance mode special figure fluctuation pattern table. Then, the first and second determination conditions are slightly different from each other.

The gaming machine W _{0B according} to another aspect of the basic embodiment displays a variation display of a symbol by a determination unit that determines whether or not a special game advantageous to the player is performed when the start condition is satisfied, and a symbol display unit. A symbol display control means for stopping and displaying the symbol in a manner indicating the result of the determination after starting, and a special game executing means for executing the special game when the determination means determines that the special game is to be performed. A probability control means for controlling a probability of determining that the special game is to be performed by the determination means to a predetermined low probability or a predetermined high probability higher than the low probability after the special game is executed; The game can be controlled in an auxiliary game state (for example, the electric support game state) in which the start condition is easily satisfied until the predetermined number of times of the variation display of the symbol is finished when the probability is controlled, and the control is performed with the high probability. The And the auxiliary game control means for allowing the game to continue to be controlled in the auxiliary game state even when the predetermined number of times of the variation display of the symbol is finished, and the game is controlled in the auxiliary game state. And an effect control means for producing an effect when the game is being controlled, and the effect control means is controlled with the high probability when the game is controlled with the high probability and in the auxiliary gaming state. Specific effect mode control means for effecting in a specific effect mode (for example, probability variation mode) that suggests, the specific effect mode control means, the number of times of the variable display of the symbol exceeds the predetermined number of times, There are a case where an effect is performed in a specific effect mode and a case where an effect is performed in the specific effect mode before the number of times of the variable display of the symbol exceeds the predetermined number of times.

After the execution of the special game, even if the probability that it is determined to perform the special game is controlled with a low probability or when it is controlled with a high probability, It is possible to enter an auxiliary gaming state in common. In this case, during that period, since it is a common gaming state in terms of ease of establishment of the starting condition, it is possible to conceal whether the player is controlled with low probability or controlled with high probability Become.
Since the gaming machine W _0B has a function of executing an effect in a specific effect mode that suggests high probability control after the number of times of symbol change display exceeds a predetermined number of times, the function is used. In the period up to the end of the predetermined number of symbol variations, the player can enjoy the game while having a sense of expectation for high probability control or anxiety about low probability control (while exciting). become able to.
In addition, a case where “the effect is performed in the specific effect mode after the number of times of the variable display of the symbol exceeds the predetermined number of times”, and “a case where the number of times of the variable display of the symbol exceeds the predetermined number of times” Since there is a case of “playing in a specific play mode”, if the player does not fall under the latter case, the player will strongly expect that it will fall under the former case, and a predetermined number of symbol variations will be displayed. Expectation and the like in the period until the game ends are further increased, and the interest of the game is improved.

Also, for example, in the gaming machine _W0B , the auxiliary game control means controls the auxiliary game until the change display of the symbol at the first number of times (for example, the tenth time) ends when the low probability is controlled. When controlling the game in the state, and when controlling the game in the auxiliary game state until the display of the variation of the symbol of the second number of times (for example, the 20th time) greater than the first number of times ends. The production control means is controlled with the low probability or the high probability, and when the game is controlled in the auxiliary gaming state, and when the number of variable display of the symbol is the first number, There may be provided a sign production control means for performing a sign production (for example, mode change production production; see FIG. 22A, etc.) that suggests the possibility that the production is performed in a specific production mode.

  With this sign production, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation that the production in the specific production mode will be performed after the first variation display of the symbol is finished. In addition, since the game may be controlled in the auxiliary gaming state until the second variation display of the symbol, which is larger than the first number, is ended, the sign effect at the first number is a so-called gasse effect. Even if it exists, the feeling of expectation for the high probability control remains, and the player can enjoy the change display of the symbol up to the second number of times with expectation.

The description of the gaming machine _W0B will be supplemented. Determining means in the gaming machine W _0B, the symbol display control means, special game execution means, the probability control means and the auxiliary game control means is realized by the main control unit 401 for example in the gaming machine 100 (however, a decorative pattern a pattern If captured, the symbol display control means is realized by the effect control unit 403). The effect control means in the gaming machine W _0B is realized by the effect control unit 403 in the gaming machine 100, for example. The symbol in the gaming machine W _0B may be considered as a special symbol, or may be considered as a decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol, but in the following, for the sake of concrete explanation, the symbol in the gaming machine W _0B Considering that the symbol is a special symbol, the explanation of the gaming machine _W0B will be supplemented.

  Special games include games that involve opening a special prize opening. The special prize opening may be the big prize opening 109, and thus the special game may be a game (for example, a big hit game) with the opening of the big prize opening 109. In this case, the determination in the determination means includes determination per special figure, and may further include special symbol determination and special pattern fluctuation pattern determination.

  “Controlled with low probability” means, for example, that after the execution of a special game, the probability that a new special game is determined to be newly controlled is controlled by the probability control means. Similarly, “control with high probability” means that, for example, after execution of a special game, the probability that a new special game is determined to be performed is controlled with high probability by the probability control means. The auxiliary game state corresponds to, for example, the electric support game state. The gaming machine can also control the game in a non-auxiliary game state (for example, a non-electric support game state) in which the start condition is difficult to be established in comparison with the auxiliary game state. The “number of times of display of the symbol change” when the low probability or the high probability is controlled may be interpreted as referring to “the number of times of display of the symbol change” calculated from the end of the special game. .

  Hereinafter, a plurality of embodiments relating to the gaming machine 100 will be described. Each embodiment described below is an embodiment based on the above-described basic embodiment, and the above description can be applied to each of the following embodiments unless otherwise specified and there is no contradiction. In the following embodiments, the description of each of the following embodiments is given priority in contradiction with the above description. Each of the following embodiments can be implemented in combination with the above-described basic embodiment, and any two or more of the following embodiments can be implemented in combination.

/// first embodiment ///
The gaming machine 100 of this embodiment performs the process shown in FIG. 35 as the command reception process. Hereinafter, the flow of command reception processing performed by the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.

――― Command reception processing; Fig.35 ―――
The command reception process in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the contents of command reception processing in the present embodiment. In the command reception process of FIG. 35, the CPU 431 first determines whether or not a prior determination command has been received from the main control unit 401 (step S20001). The prior determination command indicates the determination result of the preliminary determination process (see FIG. 15) of the main control unit 401, and in the output process (see FIG. 15) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 401, the main control unit 401. Sent from

  If a prior determination command has not been received (No in step S20001), the process proceeds to step S20006. If the advance determination command has been received (Yes in step S20001), the storage content of the advance determination information storage area 433c (see FIG. 14) is updated based on the advance determination command (step S20002).

  In step S20002, the CPU 431 updates the stored content of the advance determination information storage area 433c based on the advance determination command, then executes the effect mode control determination process (step S20003), and proceeds to step S20004. In the effect mode control determination process, an effect mode flag (corresponding to the mode flag of FIG. 17 relating to the effect mode) stored in the RAM 433 is referred to, and the current effect mode (that is, the target effect mode) is the reference mode. It is determined which of the plurality of reference modes is to be used for rendering. Details of the effect mode control determination process will be described later (see FIG. 36).

  In step S20004, the CPU 431 executes effect content prior determination processing, and the process proceeds to step S20005. In the effect content prior determination process, it is determined whether or not to determine in advance the content of the variation effect to be executed during the variation display of the special symbol subject to prior determination, and if it is determined to determine the effect content in advance, The process of determining the contents of is executed. Details of the effect content prior determination process will be described later (see FIG. 47). In addition, in this embodiment, when it is simply described as “contents of effect”, it indicates “contents of variation effect”.

  In step S 20005, the CPU 431 recognizes that the number of hold information (U 1 or U 2) has increased by “1” based on the advance determination command, and additionally displays the hold image corresponding to the advance determination target on the image display unit 104. In step S20006, it is determined whether a change start command is received from the main control unit 401. If the change start command has not been received (No in step S20006), the process directly proceeds to step S20008. If the fluctuation start command has been received (Yes in step S20006), the process proceeds to step S20007. When the content of the effect is determined in advance in step S20004, the CPU 431 determines in advance according to the content of the hold effect (see step S20004-4-2 in FIG. 48 described later) included in the determined effect content. A predetermined hold image is additionally displayed at the hold image display position corresponding to the target. The prior determination command also includes information indicating which of the holding information numbers U1 and U2 has increased.

  In step S20007, the CPU 431 executes an effect start process. In the case where the effect content is determined in advance in step S20004 for the special figure determination information related to the change start command, the effect effect is executed according to the effect content information, and the effect content is determined in advance in step S20004. If not, in this step, the specific contents of the variation effect are determined. The CPU proceeds to step S20008 after performing the effect start process in step S20007.

  In step S <b> 20008, the CPU 431 determines whether a change stop command has been received from the main control unit 401. If the change stop command has not been received (No in step S20008), the process directly proceeds to step S20010. If the change stop command has been received (Yes in step S20008), the CPU 431 performs an effect end process for ending the executed change effect (step S20009), and then proceeds to step S20010.

  In step S20010, the CPU 431 determines whether a normal symbol command is received from the main control unit 401 or not. As the normal symbol commands, there are a common symbol variation start command and a common symbol variation stop command set in the normal symbol processing of the main control unit 401. If the normal symbol command has not been received (No in step S20010), the process directly proceeds to step S20012. If the normal symbol command is received (Yes in step S20010), the CPU 431 performs the normal diagram effect process (step S20011), and then proceeds to step S20012. Although details are omitted, in the normal drawing production process, for example, after starting the execution of the general drawing production dependent on the general drawing change start command in response to the reception of the general drawing change start command, the normal drawing fluctuation stop command is received. Along with this, the general drawing production is stopped.

  In step S20012, the CPU 431 determines whether or not an opening command has been received from the main control unit 401. If the opening command has not been received (No in step S20012), the process directly proceeds to step S20014. If the opening command has been received (Yes in step S20012), the CPU 431 starts a winning effect process for executing the winning effect (step S20013), and proceeds to step S20014. As the hit effect, there are a jackpot effect that is an effect during a jackpot game and a jackpot effect that is an effect during a jackpot game. The jackpot production may be determined for each type of jackpot.

  In step S20014, the CPU 431 determines whether an ending command has been received from the main control unit 401 or not. If the ending command has not been received (No in step S20014), the command reception process is terminated as it is. If an ending command has been received (Yes in step S20014), the CPU 431 stops the winning effect process being executed, while performing an ending effect process for executing a predetermined ending effect (step S20015). The reception process ends.

――― Direction mode control determination processing; Fig.36 ―――
With reference to FIG. 36, the effect mode control determination process shown in step S20003 of FIG. 35 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect mode control determination process. In the effect mode control determination process of FIG. 36, the CPU 431 first acquires effect mode control determination information (step S20003-1), and proceeds to step S20003-2. Here, the production mode control determination information is the result of the prior determination process executed by the CPU 411 for the special figure determination information corresponding to the prior determination target (hereinafter, “the CPU 411 executes the special figure determination information”). The result of the prior determination process ”is referred to as“ preliminary determination result ”.), Information indicating the effect mode flag, information indicating the reference mode flag, information indicating the stage flag, effect content information, and effect random numbers.

  As described above, the preliminary determination result is a result of the preliminary determination process performed on the special figure determination information by the CPU 411. Pre-judgment is combined with special figure judgment, special figure judgment, and special figure variation pattern judgment (hereinafter referred to as "per special figure judgment, special figure judgment, and special figure fluctuation pattern judgment"). This is executed before the right of) is consumed, and a determination similar to the special figure determination is performed. The prior determination result is information included in the prior determination command. Note that the digestion of the right of special figure determination means that the special figure determination is executed. When the right of special figure determination is suspended, the special figure determination is performed in the special figure determination information storage area 413d. The special figure determination information stored in the storage area set with the highest priority of the right is acquired as the determination target TT by the CPU 411 and the special figure determination is executed.

  The information indicating the effect mode flag is information indicating the mode flag associated with each effect mode, and is stored in the RAM 433 as described above. Information indicating the reference mode flag is stored in the RAM 433. Although details of the reference mode flag will be described later, when the effect mode flag indicates the reference mode (when “4” is set in the effect mode flag), determination per special figure included in the determination result of the prior determination target. This is information indicating which reference mode flag is set among the first reference mode to the third reference mode set differently in the degree of expectation that is a big hit. Information indicating the stage flag is stored in the RAM 433. Although the details of the stage flag will be described later, when the reference mode flag indicates the third reference mode (see FIG. 41 when “43” is set in the reference mode flag), the effect mode of the variation effect is common. This is information indicating which stage flag is set among the first stage to the third stage in which some of the images referred to during the variation effect are set differently.

  The effect content information is stored in the RAM 433. In the effect content information, information indicating the effect content currently being executed for the information for special figure determination for which the right for special figure determination has been digested, and for special figure determination for which the right for special figure determination is suspended As a result of the execution content prior determination process (step S20004) being performed on the information, information indicating the production content when the production content is determined in advance is included.

  The effect random number is a random number acquired by the effect random number update process executed by the CPU 431. The effect random number update process is a process executed by the CPU 431 executing the effect random number update process program in the effect timer interruption process (see FIG. 56). The effect random number update processing program updates the count value of various effect random number acquisition counters. For example, every time the effect random number update processing program is executed, the count value of the first effect random number counter stored in the effect counter storage area 433e (not shown in FIG. 12, see FIG. 37) provided in the RAM 433 is provided. Then, “1” is added to the count value of the second effect random number counter, the count value of the third effect random number counter, the count value of the fourth effect random number counter, and the count value of the fifth effect random number counter.

  FIG. 37 shows an example of the contents stored in the effect counter storage area 433e. The effect control unit 403 includes a first effect random number counter SC1, a second effect random number counter SC2, a third effect random number counter SC3, a fourth effect random number counter SC4, and a fifth effect random number counter SC5. The counter storage area 433e stores count values of various effect random number counters managed by the effect control unit 403. The counters SC1 to SC5 count the first effect random number, the second effect random number, the third effect random number, the fourth effect random number, and the fifth effect random number, respectively.

  When the count value of the first effect random number counter SC1 reaches a predetermined value (for example, “299”), the effect random number update processing program returns the count value to, for example, “0” and performs the same count-up again. Make it. In addition, when the count value of the second effect random number counter SC2 reaches a predetermined value (for example, “299”), the effect random number update processing program returns the count value to, for example, “0”, and repeats the same count-up. To do. Further, when the count value of the third effect random number counter SC3 reaches a predetermined value (for example, “299”), the count value is returned to, for example, “0” and the same count up is performed again. Further, when the count value of the fourth effect random number counter SC4 reaches a predetermined value (for example, “299”), the count value is returned to, for example, “0” and the same count up is performed again. Further, when the count value of the fifth effect random number counter SC5 reaches a predetermined value (for example, “299”), the count value is returned to, for example, “0” and the same count up is performed again.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, for example, the first effect random number to the fifth effect random number are counted within the range of “0 to 299”, for example, but the range of each effect random number is different. A range may be set. In step S20003-1, the CPU 431 obtains each effect random number with reference to the count values of the first effect random number counter SC1 to the fifth effect random number counter SC5 stored in the effect counter storage area 433e. In this embodiment, five effect random numbers (first to fifth effect random numbers) are acquired as effect random numbers. However, the number of effect random numbers is not limited to five, and four effect random numbers. The number may be 6 or less.

  In step S20003-2, CPU 431 determines whether or not the effect mode indicated by the effect mode flag is the reference mode (“4” is set in effect mode flag). If the effect mode flag is the reference mode (Yes in step S20003-2), the process proceeds to step S20003-3. If the effect mode flag is not the reference mode (No in step S20003-2), the effect mode control determination process is terminated. To do.

  In step S20003-3, the CPU 431 determines whether or not the number of held information U1 recognized by the CPU 431 is one or more. If the number of held information U1 is 1 or more (Yes in step S20003-3), the process proceeds to step S20003-4, and if the number of held information U1 is not 1 or more, that is, 0 (No in step S20003-3). ), The process proceeds to step S20003-8.

    In step S20003-4, the CPU 431 determines the content of the advance in advance, that is, for the special drawing determination information for which the right of the special drawing determination is consumed before the prior determination target. It is determined whether or not a special effect (so-called reach effect) is included. As will be described later, when the special figure fluctuation pattern included in the preliminary determination result matches the special figure fluctuation pattern for which “fixed value” is set in the special figure fluctuation pattern table (see FIGS. 38 and 39), The effect contents are determined in advance, and the effect contents include a reach effect as described later. Therefore, the determination in this step can be paraphrased as determining whether or not the special determination variation pattern associated with the special variation variation effect pattern in which the reach effect is executed is included in the preliminary determination result of the advance hold. If the special effect is included in the advance reservation effect content (Yes in step S20003-4), the process proceeds to step S20003-8, and if the advance reservation effect content does not include the special effect (in step S20003-4). No), it proceeds to step S20003-5.

  In step S20003-5, the CPU 431 performs a first reference mode execution determination process. In the first reference mode execution determination process, an effect content determination table associated with the first reference mode (refer to FIG. 50 for an example of the effect content determination table) is selected when determining the effect content to be determined in advance. It is determined whether or not to do. In the present embodiment, the determination of this step is performed on the basis of the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination target and the first effect random number.

  Although the details of the significance of the first reference mode and the second reference mode and the third reference mode, which will be described later, will be described later, briefly, the first reference mode is a judgment per special figure included in the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination target. This corresponds to a look-ahead effect mode with a high expectation level (corresponding to the above-mentioned reliability) that is a big hit, and the second reference mode is a big hit when the result of the special figure determination included in the prior determination result of the prior determination target It corresponds to a look-ahead effect mode in which a certain degree of expectation is lower than that in the first reference mode but higher than that in the third reference mode. This corresponds to the normal mode in which the degree of expectation is low (as usual). In the present embodiment, as described above, three stages (first stage to third stage) are set in the third reference mode, and the stages are sequentially changed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Details of the three stages will be described later.

  First, the special figure variation pattern table stored in the ROM 412 of the main control unit 401 in this embodiment will be described. As described above, the ROM 412 includes, as the special figure fluctuation pattern table, the chance mode special figure fluctuation pattern table, the branching effect mode special figure fluctuation pattern table, the probability variation mode special figure fluctuation pattern table, and the reference mode special figure fluctuation. A plurality of special figure variation pattern tables including a pattern table and a latent mode special figure variation pattern table are formed.

38 and 39 are examples of the reference mode special figure variation pattern table in the present embodiment. In the special mode fluctuation pattern table for the reference mode in the present embodiment, the first special figure fluctuation pattern table THtt1 (see FIG. 38) selected when the random number per special figure shows a loss, and the random number per special figure shows a big hit. And a second special figure variation pattern table THtt2 (see FIG. 39) selected in this case. The special figure variation pattern table THt included in the ROM 412 shown in FIG. 4 can be configured to include a table THtt1 and a table THtt2.

  Each of the tables THtt1 to THtt2 is a table in which predetermined determination values are associated with all or a part of the special figure fluctuation patterns THpA to THpH. Each special figure variation pattern THpA to THpH defines the variation mode (variation time) of the special symbol. That is, each special pattern variation pattern THpA to THpH is associated with a variation time, and the variation time of the special symbol is 1 second, 3 seconds, 10 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, 60 seconds, 70, respectively. Second, 90 seconds.

  In the first special figure fluctuation pattern table THtt1 selected when the random number per special figure shows a loss, among the special figure fluctuation patterns THpA to THpH, "undefined value" is set in the patterns THpA to THpC, and the patterns THpD to A “fixed value” is set for THpH. That is, the “undefined value” is set for a special pattern variation pattern with different determination values associated with the number of holdings, and the “fixed value” is a fixed determination value regardless of the number of holdings. Set for special figure variation pattern. On the other hand, in the second special figure fluctuation pattern table THtt2 selected when the random number per special figure indicates a big hit, the determination values associated with the special figure fluctuation patterns THpA to THpH are constant regardless of the number of holdings. In addition, “fixed values” are set for all the special figure fluctuation patterns THpA to THpH. In the present embodiment, no determination value is associated with the pattern THpH in the table THtt1, and no determination value is associated with the patterns THpA to THpC in the table THtt2. .

  In the reference mode, the CPU 411 selects the table THtt1 or the table THtt2 according to the random number per special figure (depending on whether the random number per special figure indicates a loss or a big hit). Thereafter, when the special figure fluctuation pattern random number to be determined in advance matches the determination value associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern THpX in the selection table, the CPU 411 sets the special figure fluctuation pattern corresponding to the prior determination target as the special figure fluctuation pattern. A special figure variation pattern THpX is selected and set (where X is an alphabet from A to H). The table Thtt1 is composed of four tables THtt1_1 to THtt1_4 selected according to the number of holds. Each table THtt1_1 to THtt1_4 is a table that is selected when the number of holds is 0, 1, 2, or 3, respectively.

  The case where the random number per special figure indicates a loss will be described in more detail. The CPU 411 selects the table THtt1 and, in the table THtt1, selects any one of the tables THtt1_1 to THtt1_4 according to the number of holds. After that, the CPU 411 determines the prior determination target when the special figure fluctuation pattern random number to be determined in advance matches the determination value associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern THpX in any of the tables THtt1_1 to THtt1_4 in the table THtt1. The special figure fluctuation pattern THpX is selected and set as the special figure fluctuation pattern corresponding to (where X is an alphabet from A to H). Note that the number of holds in the selection and setting of the special figure variation pattern is the number of special figure determination information having a lower priority than the special figure determination information corresponding to the prior determination target, and the start corresponding to the prior determination target Since the number of holds is 0 when the condition is satisfied (game ball winning for the start port 105), the table to be selected is THtt1_1. However, as will be described later, when the production contents are not determined in advance for the object to be determined in advance, the right to determine the special figure for the object to be determined in advance is digested and the special symbol variation display is started (FIG. 35). In step S20007), it is necessary to determine the contents of the effect. At that time, the CPU 411 selects one of the tables THtt1_1 to THtt5 in accordance with the number of holds in the table THtt1, and selects and sets the special figure variation pattern. Run.

  When the number of holdings is 0, as shown in the table THtt1_1, a total of 60 determination values “0 to 59” are respectively provided for the special figure variation patterns THpA, THpB, THpC, THpD, THpE, THpF, THpG, 190 determination values “60 to 249”, 225 determination values “250 to 474”, 16 determination values “475 to 490”, 5 determination values “491 to 495”, 3 in total One judgment value “496 to 498” and one judgment value “499” are assigned (each judgment value is an integer).

  When the number of holdings is 1, as shown in the table THtt1_2, a total of 120 judgment values “0 to 119” are respectively provided for the special figure variation patterns THpA, THpB, THpC, THpD, THpE, THpF, THpG, 190 determination values “120 to 309” in total, 165 determination values “310 to 474”, 16 determination values “475 to 490”, 5 determination values “491 to 495”, 3 in total One judgment value “496 to 498” and one judgment value “499” are assigned (each judgment value is an integer).

  When the number of holdings is 2, as shown in the table THtt1_3, a total of 180 judgment values “0 to 179” are respectively obtained for the special figure variation patterns THpA, THpB, THpC, THpD, THpE, THpF, THpG, 190 judgment values “180-369”, 105 judgment values “370-474”, 16 judgment values “475-490”, 5 judgment values “491-495”, 3 in total One judgment value “496 to 498” and one judgment value “499” are assigned (each judgment value is an integer).

  When the number of holdings is 3, as shown in the table THtt1_4, a total of 240 judgment values “0 to 239” are respectively obtained for the special figure variation patterns THpA, THpB, THpC, THpD, THpE, THpF, THpG, 190 judgment values “240-429”, 45 judgment values “430-474”, 16 judgment values “475-490”, 5 judgment values “491-495”, 3 in total One judgment value “496 to 498” and one judgment value “499” are assigned (each judgment value is an integer).

  In the table THtt2, a total of 125 judgment values “0 to 24” and a total of 50 judgment values “25 to 74” and a total of 125 for the special figure variation patterns THpD, THpE, THpF, THpG, and THpH, respectively. Determination values “75 to 199”, a total of 290 determination values “200 to 489”, and a total of 10 determination values “490 to 499” are assigned (each determination value is an integer).

  When the random number per special figure indicates a loss, the following effects are obtained by selecting different tables depending on the number of holds. For example, when the number of holdings is 0 and the number of holdings is 3, the number of determination values associated with the pattern THpA when the number of holdings is 0 (60 determination values 0 to 0). 50), the number of determination values associated with the pattern THpA (240 determination values 0 to 299) is larger when the number of holdings is three. On the other hand, when the number of reservations is 0, the number of determination values associated with the pattern THpG (225 determination values 250 to 474) is associated with the pattern THpC when the number of reservations is three. The number of determination values (45 determination values 430 to 474) is smaller. Therefore, when the number of holdings is small, a pattern with a longer variation time is easily selected, and when the number of holdings is large, a pattern with a shorter variation time is easily selected. With this configuration, when the number of holdings is small, the holding digest is completed in a short time, and the occurrence of a situation in which the display of the effect image executed during the special symbol fluctuation display in the image display unit 104 is stopped is suppressed. Can do. On the other hand, if the number of suspensions is large, the digestion of the suspension is completed in a short time, so that the player can refrain from performing the act of stopping the launch of the game ball (so-called “stopping action”), and the operating rate of the gaming machine Can be prevented.

  Returning to the first reference mode execution determination process in step S20003-5, the CPU 431 refers to the first reference mode execution determination table MHt1 stored in the ROM 432, and determines the prior determination result of the prior determination target and the first effect. The first reference mode execution determination process is executed based on the random number for use.

  FIG. 40 shows an example of the first reference mode execution determination table MHt1. The first reference mode execution determination table MHt1 includes a first reference mode execution determination table MHt1_1 for loss and a first reference mode execution determination table MHt1_2 for jackpot.

  Each of the tables MHt1_1 and MHt1_2 is a table in which the determination value S1 is associated with all or part of the special figure fluctuation patterns THpA to THpH. The CPU 431 selects the table MHt1_1 when the determination result per special figure included in the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination target indicates a loss, and the determination result per special figure included in the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination target indicates jackpot. In this case, the table MHt1_2 is selected. In addition, after selecting either the table MHt1_1 or the table MHt1_2, the CPU 431 responds to each of execution / non-execution of the first reference mode effect according to the special figure variation pattern included in the advance determination result of the advance determination target. The determination value S1 to be attached is compared with the first effect random number. If the first effect random number matches one of the determination values S1 associated with the execution of the first reference mode effect, it is determined that the first reference mode is executed, and the first effect random number is determined to be the first reference mode. If it matches any of the determination values S1 associated with the non-execution of the effect, it is determined that the first reference mode is not executed.

  For example, the CPU 431 selects and acquires the table MHt1_1 when the determination result per special figure included in the pre-determination result to be pre-determined indicates a loss and the special figure fluctuation pattern indicates the special figure fluctuation pattern THpF. If the first effect random number matches one of the determination values (0 to 14) associated with the execution of the first reference mode effect, it is determined that the first reference mode is executed, and the first reference mode is set. If it matches any of the determination values (15 to 299) associated with performance non-execution, it is determined that the first reference mode is not executed.

  In the table MHt1_1, for the special figure variation patterns THpA to THpE, all the determination values “0 to 299” are assigned to the non-execution of the first reference mode effect, and the determination values are not assigned to the execution. Further, when the special figure fluctuation patterns THpF and THpG are compared in the table MHt1_1, the number (20) of determination values assigned to the execution of the first reference mode effect in the special figure fluctuation pattern THpG having a long fluctuation time varies. The number of determination values assigned is set larger than the number of determination values assigned to the execution of the first reference mode effect (15) in the special figure variation pattern THpF having a short time, and the first reference mode effect is executed. Cheap.

  Further, in the table MHt1_2, for the special figure variation patterns THpD to THpE, all the determination values “0 to 299” are assigned to the non-execution of the first reference mode effect, and no determination values are assigned to the execution. Further, in the table MHt1_2, when the special figure fluctuation patterns THpF to THpH are compared, the number of determination values (110) assigned to the execution of the first reference mode effect in the special figure fluctuation pattern THpH having the longest fluctuation time, Number of determination values (100) assigned to the execution of the first reference mode effect in the special figure fluctuation pattern THpG having a long fluctuation time, and assignment to the execution of the first reference mode effect in the special figure fluctuation pattern THpF having the shortest fluctuation time The number of assigned judgment values is set to be smaller in the order of the number of judgment values assigned (90), and the first reference mode effect is less likely to be executed in this order.

  Further, when comparing the same special figure fluctuation pattern in the table MHt1_1 and the table MHt1_2, for example, in the special figure fluctuation pattern THpF, than the number of determination values (15) assigned to the execution of the first reference mode effect at the time of loss, The number of determination values (90) assigned to the execution of the first reference mode effect at the time of the big hit is assigned more, and the first reference mode effect is set to be executed at a higher probability at the big hit than at the time of the loss. .

  The CPU 431 proceeds to step S20003-6 after determining execution of the first reference mode in step S20003-5, and determines whether or not it is determined to execute the first reference mode in step S20003-5. If it is determined in step S20003-5 that the first reference mode is to be executed (Yes in step S20003-6), the process proceeds to step S20003-7, and the setting reservation of the mode flag “41” is executed as the reference mode flag. If it is not determined in step S20003-5 that the first reference mode is to be executed (No in step S20003-6), the process proceeds to step S20003-8.

  FIG. 41 shows an example of the reference mode table MKt stored in the ROM 432. As shown in FIG. 41, a reference mode flag is associated with the first reference mode, the second reference mode, and the third reference mode in the reference mode table MKt. In addition, a mode flag is associated with the first to third stages included in the third reference mode. The states in which the first to third reference modes are set correspond to the states in which “41”, “42”, and “43” are set in the mode flag, respectively, and are included in the third reference mode. The state in which the first to third stages are set corresponds to the state in which “431”, “432”, and “433” are set in the mode flag, respectively. Each mode flag is stored in the RAM 433 and its value is variably set by the CPU 431. In step S20003-7, the CPU 431 executes the setting reservation for the mode flag “41”, and ends the effect mode control determination process. Hereinafter, “41”, “42”, “43”, “431”, “432”, “433” are set in the mode flag, respectively, and the first reference mode flag “41”, the second reference mode flag “ 42 ”, third reference mode flag“ 43 ”, first stage flag“ 431 ”, second stage flag“ 432 ”, and third stage flag“ 433 ”may be set.

  As described later with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46, the setting reservation of the mode flag “41” executed by the CPU 431 in step S20003-7 is any timing after the end of the variation display period of the special symbol of the variation. Indicates that a reservation is made to set the first reference mode flag “41”, the first reference mode flag “41” is set after the change display period of the change, and the mode flag setting indicating the setting timing is set. The reservation information is stored in the RAM 433. In step S20007 shown in FIG. 35, the CPU 431 refers to the mode flag setting reservation information stored in the RAM 433, and sets the first reference mode flag “41” when the setting timing included in the mode flag setting reservation information has arrived. To do.

  In step S20003-8, the CPU 431 performs second reference mode execution determination processing. In the second reference mode execution determination process, it is determined whether or not to select the special figure variation effect pattern table associated with the second reference mode when determining the contents of the effect to be determined in advance. In the present embodiment, the determination of this step is performed based on the preliminary determination result of the target of preliminary determination and the second effect random number. Specifically, with reference to the second reference mode execution determination table MHt2, determination is made based on the prior determination result of the prior determination target and the second effect random number.

  FIG. 42 shows an example of the second reference mode execution determination table MHt2 stored in the ROM 432. The second reference mode execution determination table MHt2 includes a second reference mode execution determination table MHt2_1 for loss and a second reference mode execution determination table MHt2_2 for jackpot.

  Each of the tables MHt2_1 and MHt2_2 is a table in which the determination value S2 is associated with all or part of the special figure fluctuation patterns THpA to THpH. The CPU 431 selects the table MHt2_1 when the determination result per special figure included in the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination target indicates a loss, and the determination result per special chart included in the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination target indicates jackpot. In this case, the table MHt2_2 is selected. In addition, after selecting either the table MHt2_1 or the table MHt2_2, the CPU 431 responds to each of execution / non-execution of the second reference mode effect according to the special figure variation pattern included in the advance determination result of the advance determination target. The determination value S2 to be attached is compared with the second effect random number. When the second effect random number matches one of the determination values S2 associated with the execution of the second reference mode effect, it is determined that the second reference mode is executed, and the second effect random number is determined to be the second reference mode. If it matches any of the determination values S2 associated with the non-execution of the effect, it is determined not to execute the second reference mode.

  For example, the CPU 431 selects and acquires the table MHt2_1 when the determination result per special figure included in the pre-determination result to be determined indicates that the special figure fluctuation pattern indicates the special figure fluctuation pattern THpF. When the second effect random number matches one of the determination values (0 to 59) associated with the execution of the second reference mode effect, it is determined that the second reference mode is executed, and the second reference mode is determined. If it matches any of the determination values (60 to 299) associated with performance non-execution, it is determined not to execute the second reference mode.

  In the table MHt2_1, all the determination values “0 to 299” are assigned to the non-execution of the second reference mode effect for the special figure variation patterns THpA to THpC, and no determination value is assigned to the execution. Further, in the table MHt2_1, when the special figure fluctuation patterns THpD to THpG are compared, the number (70) of determination values assigned to the execution of the second reference mode effect in the special figure fluctuation pattern THpG having the longest fluctuation time, The number of determination values (60) assigned to the execution of the second reference mode effect in the special figure fluctuation pattern THpF having a long fluctuation time, and the second reference mode effect in the special figure fluctuation pattern THpE having the next long fluctuation time. The number of determination values assigned to the execution (50 pieces) and the number of determination values assigned to the execution of the second reference mode effect (40 pieces) in the special figure fluctuation pattern THpD having the shortest fluctuation time are assigned in this order. The number of determination values is set to be small, and the second reference mode effect is easily executed in this order.

  Further, in the table MHt2_2, when the special figure fluctuation patterns THpD to THpH are compared, the number of determination values (130) assigned to the execution of the second reference mode effect in the special figure fluctuation pattern THpH having the longest fluctuation time, The number of determination values (120) assigned to the execution of the second reference mode effect in the special figure fluctuation pattern THpG having a long fluctuation time, and the execution of the second reference mode effect in the special figure fluctuation pattern THpF having the next long fluctuation time. The number of determination values assigned to (110), the number of determination values assigned to the execution of the second reference mode effect (100) in the special figure fluctuation pattern THpE having the next longest fluctuation time, and the longest fluctuation time In the order of the number of determination values (90) assigned to the execution of the second reference mode effect in the short special figure variation pattern THpD, Ri number caul was determined value is set small, easy second reference mode effect is executed in this order.

  Further, when comparing the same special figure fluctuation pattern in the table MHt2_1 and the table MHt2_2, for example, in the special figure fluctuation pattern THpF, than the number of determination values (60) assigned to the execution of the second reference mode effect at the time of loss, A larger number (110) of determination values assigned to the execution of the second reference mode effect at the time of the big hit is assigned, and the second reference mode effect is set to be executed with a higher probability at the time of the big hit than at the time of the loss. .

  In addition, the first reference mode effect is set to be executed less easily than the second reference mode effect. Specifically, with reference to FIG. 40 and FIG. 42, in the table MHt2_1 that is selected when the result of determination per special figure included in the pre-determination result to be pre-determined is lost, the special figure fluctuation patterns THpA to THpC In the table MHt1_1, which is selected when the determination value S2 is not assigned to the execution of the second reference mode effect in FIG. In addition to the patterns THpA to THpC, the special reference variation patterns THpD to THpE are not assigned the determination value S1 for the execution of the first reference mode effect, and the first reference mode effect has a relatively short change time. (40 seconds or less) Not executed in case of special figure fluctuation pattern. For example, for the special figure variation pattern THpF, the determination values S1 and S2 are assigned to the execution of the first reference mode effect and the execution of the second reference mode effect in the table MHt1_1 and the table MHt2_1, respectively. The number of determination values is 15 for the former, whereas it is 60 for the latter, and the second reference mode is easier to execute.

  40 and 42, in the table MHt2_2 that is selected when the determination result per special figure included in the preliminary determination result of the determination target is a big hit, the second in the special figure variation patterns THpD to THpH. Although the determination value S2 is assigned to the execution of the reference mode effect, in the table MHt1_2, the determination value S1 is not assigned to the execution of the first reference mode effect in the special figure fluctuation patterns THpD to THpE, and the special figure fluctuation pattern. Only for THpF to THpH, the determination value S1 is assigned to the execution of the first reference mode effect. Therefore, the first reference mode effect is not executed in the case of a special figure fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is relatively short (40 seconds or less). For example, for the special figure variation pattern THpF, the determination values S1 and S2 are assigned to the execution of the first reference mode effect and the execution of the second reference mode effect in the table MHt1_2 and the table MHt2_2, respectively. The number of determination values is 90 for the former, whereas it is 110 for the latter, and the second reference mode is easier to execute.

  As can be understood with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39, when the result of the determination per special figure included in the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination target is lost, the determination per special chart included in the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination target The special pattern fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time (60 seconds or longer) is set to be difficult to select as compared to the case of the big hit, and as described above, the special fluctuation pattern having a relatively short fluctuation time (40 seconds or shorter) is set. In the figure variation pattern, since the determination value is not assigned to the execution of the first reference mode effect, the player can execute the first reference mode effect so that the special figure variation pattern having a long variation time is generated. It is possible to recognize that the selection has been made, that is, it is possible to recognize that there is a high possibility that the result of determination per special figure included in the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination target is a big hit.

  After the second reference mode execution determination in step S20003-8, the CPU 431 proceeds to step S20003-9 and determines whether or not it is determined to execute the second reference mode in step S20003-8. If it is determined in step S20003-8 that the second reference mode is to be executed (Yes in step S20003-9), the process proceeds to step S20003-10, the second reference mode flag “42” is set, and an effect mode control determination process is performed. Exit. If it is not determined in step S20003-8 that the second reference mode is to be executed (No in step S20003-9), the process proceeds to step S20003-11.

  In step S20003-11, the CPU 431 executes stage change execution determination processing, and proceeds to step S20003-12. With respect to all the stages included in the third reference mode, the expectation degree that the result of the determination per special symbol included in the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination target is a big win is set to be the same as each other, and is executed during the special symbol variation display. The contents of the variation effect are also common to each other, but are set so as not to bore the player by making a difference in a part of the image referred to during the execution of the variation effect. For example, in the present embodiment, the normal reserved image in each stage is set to refer to the reserved images associated with different characters for each stage. Specifically, a diamond image is displayed as a normal hold image in the first stage, a bullet image is displayed as a normal hold image in the second stage, and a scroll image is displayed as a normal hold image in the third stage. . In the stage change execution determination processing in step S20003-11, it is determined that the stage change is to be executed when the number of changes in the special symbol at the stage at the time when the change display of the special symbol to be determined in advance reaches a certain number. To do. The stage change may be executed sequentially in the order of the first stage, the second stage, and the third stage. The number of fluctuations of the special symbol at the stage at the time of starting the variation display of the special symbol subject to pre-judgment is the number of times the special symbol variation display was stopped at the stage and the variation display of the special symbol at the present time. Is the total number of times that the special symbol variation display is started and then stopped before the variation display of the special symbol subject to prior determination is started, in other words, the special symbol in the stage concerned. This is the total of the number of the right of determination and the number of the priority of the special figure determination that is higher than the prior determination target, and the number of the special figure determination right being suspended. The stage change execution determination method is not limited to the above-described method. As another stage change execution determination method, the stage change execution determination method may be determined using an effect random number.

  In step S20003-12, the CPU 431 sets the third reference mode flag “43” and changes the stage when execution of the stage change is determined based on the result of the stage change execution determination in step S20003-11. The setting reservation of the stage flag (one of the first stage flag “431”, the second stage flag “432”, and the third stage flag “433”) related to the subsequent stage is executed, and the effect mode control determination process is terminated. .

  The setting reservation of the stage flags “431”, “432”, and “433” executed by the CPU 431 in step S20003-12 is performed at the start of the next fluctuation after the end of the above-mentioned predetermined number of special symbol fluctuation display periods in the current stage. Indicates that reservation is made to set one of the stage flags “431”, “432”, and “433”, and the stage flags “431”, “432”, and “433” are displayed after the fluctuation display period of the fluctuation. Is stored in the RAM 433, and stage flag setting reservation information indicating the setting timing is stored in the RAM 433. In step S20007 shown in FIG. 35, the CPU 431 refers to the stage flag setting reservation information stored in the RAM 433, and when the setting timing included in the stage flag setting reservation information has arrived, the stage flags “431”, “432”, One of “433” is set.

  Hereinafter, the first reference mode, the second reference mode, and the third reference mode will be described in detail. As described above, the first reference mode corresponds to the pre-reading effect mode with a high expectation that the result of determination per special figure included in the determination result of the determination target is a big hit, and the second reference mode is determined in advance. Corresponding to the pre-reading effect mode in which the degree of expectation that the result of determination per special figure included in the target prior determination result is a big hit is lower than that in the first reference mode but higher than that in the third reference mode. This corresponds to a normal mode with a low expectation level (usually normal) in which the determination result per special figure included in the determination result prior determination result is a big hit. Hereinafter, the first reference mode, the second reference mode, and the third reference mode will be described as a strong prefetch mode, a weak prefetch mode, and a normal mode, respectively.

  In each reference mode, a variation effect mode to be executed is set corresponding to the special symbol variation display. Specifically, a basic background image mode, a decoration symbol (effect symbol) mode, a decoration symbol A variable display mode, a pseudo-continuous effect mode, a special effect (reach effect) mode, and the like are set for each reference mode. However, some aspects may be the same between the reference modes, and in this embodiment, the normal mode and the weak lookahead mode are the same except for the basic background image aspect. On the other hand, each mode of the strong prefetch mode is different from each mode of the normal mode and the weak prefetch mode. The basic background image is a background image that is set in common in each mode, and is displayed as the background of the decorative symbol display when the decorative symbol variable display is executed as the main effect. It is an image.

  FIG. 43 shows an example of each mode that focuses on the basic background image and the decoration pattern. (A) is an example in the normal mode, (b) is an example in the weak lookahead mode, and (c) is in the example. A production example in the strong look-ahead mode is shown. In the comparison between the normal mode and the weak lookahead mode, the decoration pattern is common. In addition, in the comparison between the normal mode and the weak lookahead mode, the basic configuration of the basic background image (the objects (building group and row of trees) included in the basic background image are common, but the image saturation, The brightness is different, etc. In this embodiment, the difference between the basic background image in the normal mode and the weak lookahead mode is that the basic configuration is common, but at least one of color, brightness, saturation, and pattern is common. Therefore, the normal mode and the weak look-ahead mode can make the player recognize a certain commonality.

  On the other hand, in the comparison between the strong look-ahead mode and the normal mode or the weak look-ahead mode, the decorative pattern and the basic background image are different (there are no common objects or very few, and many different objects are included). The player can recognize that the common look-ahead mode and the normal mode or the weak look-ahead mode cannot be found, and that completely or almost different variation effects can be started.

  FIG. 44 shows a special symbol variation (meaning “variation of a special symbol”, and “variation” indicates a variation of the special symbol symbol in the present embodiment and the second to sixth embodiments hereinafter). 6 shows an example of a timing chart showing the relationship between the change display and the first and second reference mode flag settings. (A) is an example of a timing chart showing the relationship between the fluctuation display of the special figure fluctuation and the first reference mode flag setting, and (b) is the fluctuation display of the special figure fluctuation when the holding information number U1 is zero. It is an example of a timing chart which shows the relationship with the 2nd standard mode flag setting, and (c) shows the relationship between the fluctuation display of special figure fluctuation, and the 2nd standard mode flag setting when number of holding information U1 is one. It is an example of a timing chart. As shown in FIG. 44, it is assumed that the changing effect corresponding to the changing display of the current special symbol is executed based on the third reference mode. In addition, it is assumed that the special figure change pattern associated with the special figure change effect pattern in which the reach effect is executed is not included in the advance determination result of the advance hold.

  As shown in the determination process of step S20003-3 in FIG. 36, when the number of held information U1 is 0, the first reference mode execution determination process is not performed. FIG. 44 (a) shows a case where there is one preceding hold, the start condition is satisfied (a game ball is won at the start port 105 and the first start port SW 414a is turned on), and the first reference mode is executed. As a result of the determination process, when the execution of the first reference mode is determined, the first reference mode flag is set after the change display period of the change.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (a), when the first reference mode flag is set, after the fluctuation display period of the fluctuation is ended, if the first reference mode flag is set when the start condition is established, the fluctuation of the fluctuation is displayed. The variation effect in the variation display period is changed to the variation effect based on the first reference mode, but as described above, the first reference mode and the third reference mode have no or almost no effect aspect. . Therefore, if the first reference mode flag is set when the start condition is satisfied, the player will feel uncomfortable because the currently executed variation effect is forcibly interrupted and a completely different variation effect is executed. This may cause discomfort.

  As shown in the determination process in step S20003-3 in FIG. 36, when the number of held information U1 is 0, the second reference mode execution determination process is performed without performing the first reference mode execution determination process. In the case of one or more, the second reference mode execution determination process is performed when it is determined not to execute the first reference mode as a result of the execution determination of the first reference mode. FIG. 44 (b) shows a case where there is no preceding hold, and FIG. 44 (c) shows a case where there is one preceding hold. In any case, the start condition is satisfied (the game ball is won at the start port 105 and the first start port SW 414a is turned ON), and the second reference mode execution is determined as a result of the second reference mode execution determination process. If so, the second reference mode flag is set at that time. By setting the second reference mode flag at this timing, it is as if the player has changed the basic background image when the game ball wins the first starting port 105 during the fluctuation display of the fluctuation. Be recognized.

  As shown in FIGS. 44B and 44C, the second reference mode flag is set when the execution of the second reference mode is determined as described above. And the third reference mode are almost in common with each other, and even if the second reference mode flag is set when the start condition is satisfied, the currently executed variation effect is continuously executed, and simply the basic background image. This is because the mode is only changed, so that it is possible to suggest the jackpot expectation level of the prior determination target without giving the player a sense of discomfort or discomfort.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the production mode is changed from the third reference mode to the first reference mode or the second reference mode, if the prior determination target is a loss, the special symbol subject to prior determination is suspended. Later, the effect in the first reference mode or the second reference mode is terminated and returned to the third reference mode (that is, the third reference mode flag is set).

  In the present embodiment, the reference mode includes a plurality of reference modes. When the effect mode is not the reference mode, as shown in step S20003 in FIG. 36, the effect mode control determination process ends. However, another production mode (for example, the chance mode) may have a plurality of modes, and in that case, the production mode control determination process may be executed.

  Further, in step S20003-3 of FIG. 36, when the number of held information U1 is 0, the first reference mode execution determination process is not executed. In the effect start process S20007, when the first reference mode execution determination is performed and it is determined that the first reference mode is to be executed, the first reference mode flag may be set at the start of the pre-decision target variation effect.

  Also, in FIG. 44, the variation effect corresponding to the current special symbol variation display is executed based on the third reference mode, but is executed based on the first reference mode or the second reference mode. In such a case, the effect mode control determination process shown in FIG. 36 may be executed. The timing for setting the third reference mode flag is set to the same timing as the timing for setting the second reference mode flag. However, when the value of the reference mode flag of the effect mode determined to be executed is larger than the value of the currently set reference mode flag, it is desirable not to set the reference mode flag determined to be executed.

  In FIG. 44A, when execution of the first reference mode is determined, the first reference mode flag is set after the change display period of the change, but during the change display period of the change, As long as the first reference mode flag is not set, for example, as shown in FIG. 45, when the start condition is satisfied, first, the second reference mode flag is set, and after the fluctuation display period of the fluctuation ends, the first reference mode flag is set. A mode flag may be set.

  In FIGS. 44 (b) and 44 (c), when setting the second reference mode flag, the second reference mode execution is determined without delay after the execution of the second reference mode execution. The mode transition suggestion may be executed, and the second reference mode flag may be set after the mode transition suggestion ends. The mode transition suggestion in the present embodiment is an effect that suggests that a change effect in the second reference mode is started, and an image that blacks out the screen for a predetermined short time or suggests the second reference mode. Is displayed. However, mode change suggestion is not executed when the remaining time until the change display stop of the change is shorter than the effect time of mode change suggestion.

  Similarly, when the remaining time until the change display stop of the change is longer than the effect time suggested by the mode transition after the execution of the first reference mode, the change effect in the first reference mode is started. It is good also as performing mode transition suggestion which suggests. As the mode transition suggestion, in addition to the mode transition suggestion that suggests that the fluctuating effect in the first reference mode is started, a so-called same color chance is obtained by making the stop symbols of the first to third decorative symbols the same color. Eye production is feasible.

  44 (b) and 44 (c), the first reference mode flag setting timing is the next change after the change display of the change (that is, at the start of the change display of the preceding hold). It may be at the start of variable display.

  FIG. 46 shows a modification of the first reference mode flag setting timing. FIG. 46 shows a case where there are three preceding holds, and in this case, the first reference mode flag setting timing may be any one of pattern 1 to pattern 3.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since it is not the electric support game state in the reference mode, the number of held information U1 is used as a reference in step S20003-3 in FIG. 36. However, as described above, the effect mode control determination is performed in the chance mode. When performing, the number of hold information U2 may be used as a reference. Further, in the reference mode, in the gaming machine in which game balls win alternately with respect to the first start port 105 and the second start port 106, the total value of the holding information numbers U1 and U2 may be used as a reference.

――― Preliminary judgment process of production contents; Fig.47 ―――
With reference to FIG. 47, the effect content prior determination process shown in step S20004 of FIG. 35 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect content prior determination process. In the effect content prior determination process of FIG. 47, the CPU 431 first obtains information for effect content prior determination (step S20001-1), and proceeds to step S2000-2. Here, the production content prior determination information refers to the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination target, information indicating the production mode flag, information indicating the reference mode flag, information indicating the stage flag, production content information, and production random number. Including.

  As described above, the prior determination result of the prior determination target is information included in the prior determination command.

  The effect mode flag is stored in the RAM 433 as described above. Information indicating the reference mode flag is stored in the RAM 433 as described above. Information indicating the stage flag is stored in the RAM 433 as described above. The effect content information is stored in the RAM 433 as described above. The effect random number is a random number acquired by the effect random number update process executed by the CPU 431 as described above.

  In step S 20004-2, the CPU 431 performs the contents of the special figure determination information (the special figure determination information) before the right of the special figure determination based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the advance determination target is digested. It is determined whether or not to determine in advance the effect contents to be executed during the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to, and the process proceeds to step S20004-3.

  The effect content prior determination execution determination process executed in step S2000-2 will be described. In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not to determine in advance the production contents for the prior determination target based on the prior determination result for the prior determination target.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39 and as described above, in the variation pattern table, “undefined value” or “fixed value” is set in each special figure variation pattern. The CPU 431 sets the “undefined value” as the special figure fluctuation pattern included in the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination target when the result of determination per special chart included in the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination target is lost. It is specified whether it is a special figure fluctuation pattern or a special figure fluctuation pattern in which “fixed value” is set, and if it is a special figure fluctuation pattern in which “indefinite value” is set, that is, the special figure fluctuation pattern THpA In the case of ~ THpC, it is determined that the production content is not determined in advance. On the other hand, in the CPU 431, the result of the determination per special figure included in the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination target is lost, and the special figure fluctuation pattern included in the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination target is set to “fixed value”. If it is a special figure variation pattern, that is, if it corresponds to the special figure fluctuation patterns THpD to THpG, and if the result of the judgment per special figure included in the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination target is a jackpot, Is determined to be determined in advance. This is because the “fixed value” is set for all the special figure fluctuation patterns in the special figure fluctuation pattern table THtt2 selected when the result of the special figure hit determination shows a big hit.

  That is, the result of judgment per special figure included in the preliminary judgment result of the preliminary judgment target is a loss, and the special figure fluctuation pattern included in the preliminary judgment result of the preliminary judgment target is set to the judgment value for which “undefined value” is set. In the case of the corresponding special figure fluctuation patterns THpA to THpC, the special figure fluctuation pattern may be changed depending on whether or not the game ball is won at the starting port 105, and the contents of the presentation are determined in advance. Even so, it is necessary to change the effect contents in accordance with the change of the special figure variation pattern, and there is a possibility that the process for determining the effect contents in advance is wasted. On the other hand, the determination result per special figure included in the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination target is a loss, and the special figure fluctuation pattern included in the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination target is set to “fixed value”. In the case of the special figure variation patterns THpD to THpG corresponding to the judgment value, and in the case where the judgment result per special figure included in the preliminary judgment result to be judged in advance is a big hit, the special figure fluctuation pattern is not changed. Even if the production content is determined in advance, the production content does not have to be changed.

  In addition, by making it possible to determine the contents of the production in advance, the result of the judgment per special figure for the pre-judgment target is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the special figure judgment information related to the hold other than the pre-judgment target. Special drawing for pre-judgment targets across the display of special symbols corresponding to the special symbol determination information related to each hold of a plurality of holds with higher priority than the pre-judgment target, suggesting the possibility of a big hit It is possible to execute an effect (so-called pre-reading effect) that suggests the possibility that the result of the hit determination is a big hit, and it is possible to enhance the player's interest by expanding the range of effects that can be executed.

  After the effect content advance determination execution determination process of step S2000-2, the process proceeds to step S20004-3, and the CPU 431 determines whether the determination result by the effect content advance determination means in step S20004-2 determines the effect content in advance. If it is determined whether or not the content of the effect is determined in advance (Yes in step S20004-3), the process proceeds to step S20004-4, and if the content of the effect is not determined in advance (in step S20004-3). No), the effect content prior determination process is terminated.

  In step S20004-4, the CPU 431 executes an effect content preliminary determination process, and proceeds to step S20004-5. In 20004-4, CPU431 determines the contents of production based on the prior judgment result of the prior judgment object acquired at Step S2000-1, the production mode flag, and the standard mode flag. In addition, it is good also as determining the production content based also on production content information. This is because, with respect to the suspension having a higher priority than the prior determination target, when the production content is determined in advance, a certain restriction may be imposed on the execution of the prefetching production. Specifically, for example, the production contents are not determined in advance for a hold with a priority higher than that of a prior determination target and two holds with a higher priority, and the production content is determined in advance for a hold with a higher priority. If it is, the execution effect lottery table that can select only the prefetch effect that is executed after the start of the variable symbol display corresponding to the information for the special figure determination with the two higher priorities as the prefetch effect. Is selected. The effect content prior determination process will be described later (see FIG. 48).

  In step S20004-5, the CPU 431 stores information indicating the content of the effect determined in step S20004-4 (effect content information) in the RAM 433.

――― Pre-decision processing of production contents; Fig.48 ―――
With reference to FIG. 48, the effect content prior determination process shown in step S20004-4 of FIG. 47 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect content prior determination process in the present embodiment. 48, the CPU 431 determines the effect content to be determined in advance. The contents of the effect are determined based on the result of prior determination to be determined in advance, the effect mode flag, and the reference mode flag.

  As described above, in the reference mode, the special figure fluctuation pattern corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern random number included in the special figure determination information to be determined in advance with reference to the special figure fluctuation pattern tables of FIGS. Is identified. Then, the CPU 431 specifies a special figure fluctuation effect pattern corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern with reference to the special figure fluctuation effect pattern table.

  FIG. 49 is an example of the special figure variation effect pattern table in the present embodiment. The special figure fluctuation effect pattern table TEtt shown in FIG. 49 stores a plurality of special figure fluctuation effect patterns that define the effect contents of the fluctuation effect. The table TEtt can be included in the special figure variation effect pattern table TEt of FIG. In FIG. 49, eight different special figure fluctuation effect patterns TEpA to TEpH are shown as part of the special figure fluctuation effect patterns stored in the table TEtt. The special figure fluctuation effect patterns TEpA to TEpH are associated with the special figure fluctuation patterns THpA to THpH (see FIGS. 38 and 39) on a one-to-one basis. In the special figure variation effect pattern table shown in FIG. 13, a part of the special figure fluctuation effect pattern and the reach effect of each expectation degree are associated with each other one by one. In FIG. 50, some special figure variation effect patterns and each reach effect are not associated one-to-one, and as shown in FIG. Production (special production) is associated. 49 are special figure variation effect patterns in which a variation effect including a special effect is executed.

  Here, the third reference mode flag “43” is set as the reference mode flag (the information indicating the reference mode flag acquired in step S20001-1 is the third reference mode), and is included in the advance determination result of the advance determination target. The effect content predetermination process will be described by taking as an example the case where the special figure fluctuation effect pattern TEpF shown in FIG. 49 is specified as the special figure fluctuation effect pattern associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern.

  In the effect content prior determination process in FIG. 48, the CPU 431 first executes a basic effect determination process (step S20004-4-1). The basic effect is that until the decorative symbols that are variably displayed in each of the three columns of decorative symbol display areas are generally temporarily stopped and finally the decorative symbols of all the columns are stopped and displayed, This is an effect executed using the image display unit 104, the speaker 114, the effect light unit 115, and the movable accessory 130. In this embodiment, the basic effect includes a pseudo-continuous effect and a special effect, which will be described later. This is an effect that does not include the hold effect and the execution effect suggestion effect.

  FIG. 50 shows an example of a basic effect content determination table for the variable effect pattern TEpF shown in FIG. 49 when the third reference mode flag “43” is set as the reference mode flag. The basic effect content determination table shown in FIG. 50 is stored in the ROM 432. The basic effect content determination table stores a plurality of basic effect patterns. Each basic effect pattern is configured in association with a determination value S3.

  Pseudo-continuous effect is the change of the temporarily stopped decorative symbol after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in one or more decorative symbol display regions among the three decorative symbol display regions in the special variable one-time variable display. It is an effect in which the variable display is started again without confirming the stop, and after the temporary stop, the result of the determination per special figure included in the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination target is a big hit by starting the variable display This indicates that the degree of expectation is high, and that the greater the number of times the variable display is started after a temporary stop, the higher the degree of expectation that the result of the judgment per special figure included in the judgment result of the judgment target is a big hit. It is a production that suggests. In the effect content determination table shown in FIG. 50, the pseudo-continuous effect A-1 is a pseudo-continuous effect in which the number of times the decorative symbol variation display after the temporary stop is started is 1, and the pseudo-continuous effect A-2 is In addition, the number of times that the decorative symbol variation display after the temporary stop is started is a pseudo-continuous effect. The jackpot expectation is higher in the order of pseudo-running effect non-execution, pseudo-running effect A-1, and A-2, and in the case of jackpot, the pseudo-running effect A-2 is more easily selected than when lost. Is set as follows. Strictly speaking, the temporary stop of the decorative symbol does not stop the decorative symbol, but for the player, the decorative symbol is slightly changed in such a manner that the player can recognize that the decorative symbol has stopped. This is a variable display mode.

  The special effect is generally called a reach effect, and in many cases, by temporarily stopping the same decorative symbol in two decorative symbol display regions among the three decorative symbol display regions, In the remaining one row of decorative symbol display areas, it is an effect that suggests that if the same decorative symbol as that temporarily stopped in the other two columns of decorative symbol display regions is temporarily stopped, a doublet will appear. When the special effect is executed, after the same decorative design is temporarily stopped in the other two rows of decorative design display areas, the same or different decorative designs are temporarily stopped in the remaining one row of decorative design display areas. By setting the fluctuation time until the game is longer than usual, the player's expectation for the jackpot is increased. One reach production is selected from multiple reach productions as the reach production using the time until the decoration design is temporarily stopped in the last one row of the design production display area. Is set.

  In the effect content determination table shown in FIG. 50, special effects B-1 and B-4 are low expectation reach effects, special effects B-2 and B-5 are medium expectation reach effects, and special effects B- 3 and B-6 are high expectation reach productions. Therefore, at the time of a loss, it is set so that a low expectation reach effect is more easily selected than at the time of a big hit, and at a big hit time, a high expectation reach effect is more easily selected than at the time of a loss. Note that the special effects B-1 and B-4 have the same basic reach effect configuration, but the former is finally an effect that shows a loss, and the latter is an effect that finally shows a jackpot. Is executed. As a specific example, the special effects B-1 and B-4 are common in that the main character and the sub character fight, but the former wins the sub character while the latter wins the main character. It is different in point to do. The same applies to the difference between the special effects B-2 and B-5 and the difference between the special effects B-3 and B-6.

  The basic effect is determined based on the third effect random number and the determination value S3. The third effect random number takes any integer value in the numerical range “0 to 299”. Referring to FIG. 50, when the result of determination per special figure included in the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination target is a loss, the basic effect including the special effect B-1 (hereinafter referred to as basic effect X1-). 1)) is assigned a determination value of “0-19”. A determination value of “20 to 29” is assigned to a basic effect including the special effect B-2 (hereinafter referred to as a basic effect X1-2). A determination value of “30 to 34” is assigned to a basic effect including the special effect B-3 (hereinafter referred to as a basic effect X1-3). Further, a determination value of “35 to 49” is assigned to a basic effect (hereinafter referred to as a basic effect X1-4) that includes the pseudo-continuous effect A-1 and the special effect B-1. Yes. In addition, a determination value of “50 to 57” is assigned to a basic effect (hereinafter referred to as a basic effect X1-5) that includes a pseudo-continuous effect A-1 and a special effect B-2. Yes. Further, a determination value of “58 to 61” is assigned to a basic effect including the pseudo-continuous effect A-1 and the special effect B-3 (hereinafter referred to as a basic effect X1-6). Yes. In addition, a determination value of “62 to 71” is assigned to a basic effect including the pseudo-continuous effect A-2 and the special effect B-1 (hereinafter referred to as a basic effect X1-7). Yes. In addition, a determination value of “72 to 76” is assigned to a basic effect including the pseudo-continuous effect A-2 and the special effect B-2 (hereinafter referred to as a basic effect X1-8). Yes. A determination value of “77 to 78” is assigned to a basic effect including the pseudo-continuous effect A-2 and the special effect B-3 (hereinafter referred to as a basic effect X1-9). Yes. When the result of determination per special figure included in the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination is lost and the special figure variation effect pattern is TEpF, the determination value of the third effect random number is “0 to 19” If it matches any of the above, the basic effect X1-1 is selected, and if it matches any of the determination values of “20 to 29”, the basic effect X1-2 is selected and “30 to 34” is selected. If it matches with any of the determination values, the basic effect X1-3 is selected, and if it matches any of the determination values of “35 to 49”, the basic effect X1-4 is selected and “50 to 57”. When it matches with any of the determination values of “”, the basic effect X1-5 is selected, and when it matches with any of the determination values of “58 to 61”, the basic effect X1-6 is selected, and “62 If it matches any of the judgment values of ~ 71 " If the basic effect X1-7 is selected and matches one of the determination values “72 to 76”, the basic effect X1-8 is selected and matches one of the determination values “77 to 78”. In such a case, the basic effect X1-9 is selected.

  On the other hand, when the result of determination per special figure included in the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination is a big hit, the basic effect including the special effect B-4 (hereinafter referred to as basic effect X2-1). In contrast, a determination value of “0 to 1” is assigned. Further, a determination value of “2 to 6” is assigned to a basic effect including the special effect B-5 (hereinafter referred to as a basic effect X2-2). A determination value of “7 to 16” is assigned to a basic effect including the special effect B-6 (hereinafter referred to as a basic effect X2-3). In addition, a determination value of “17 to 20” is assigned to a basic effect including the pseudo-continuous effect A-1 and the special effect B-4 (hereinafter referred to as a basic effect X2-4). Yes. In addition, a determination value of “21 to 28” is assigned to a basic effect (hereinafter referred to as a basic effect X2-5) that includes a pseudo-continuous effect A-1 and a special effect B-5. Yes. Further, a determination value of “29 to 43” is assigned to a basic effect including the pseudo-continuous effect A-1 and the special effect B-6 (hereinafter referred to as a basic effect X2-6). Yes. In addition, a determination value of “44 to 48” is assigned to a basic effect including the pseudo-continuous effect A-2 and the special effect B-4 (hereinafter referred to as a basic effect X2-7). Yes. In addition, a determination value of “49 to 58” is assigned to a basic effect including the pseudo-continuous effect A-2 and the special effect B-5 (hereinafter referred to as a basic effect X2-8). Yes. In addition, a determination value of “59 to 78” is assigned to a basic effect including the pseudo-continuous effect A-2 and the special effect B-6 (hereinafter referred to as a basic effect X2-9). Yes. Then, when the result of determination per special figure included in the preliminary determination result to be determined in advance is a big hit and the special figure variation effect pattern is TEpF, the determination value of the third effect random number is “0 to 1” If it matches any of the above, the basic effect X2-1 is selected, and if it matches any of the determination values of “2 to 6”, the basic effect X2-2 is selected and “7 to 16” is selected. If it matches with any of the determination values, the basic effect X2-3 is selected, and if it matches any of the determination values of “17-20”, the basic effect X2-4 is selected, and “21-28”. If it matches any of the determination values of “”, the basic effect X2-5 is selected, and if it matches any of the determination values of “29 to 43”, the basic effect X2-6 is selected, and “44 If it matches any of the judgment values of ~ 48 " When the basic effect X2-7 is selected and matches any of the determination values of “49 to 58”, the basic effect X2-8 is selected and matches with any of the determination values of “59 to 78” The basic effect X2-9 is selected.

  With this configuration, the total number (35) of determination values S3 assigned to the basic effects X2-7 to 2-9 at the time of the big hit is assigned to the basic effects X1-7 to 1-9 at the time of the loss. More than the total number of determination values S3 (17), as described above, the pseudo-continuous effect A-2 is more easily selected at the time of the big hit than at the time of the loss. Further, the total number (45) of the determination values S3 assigned to the basic effects X2-3, 2-6, and 2-9 at the time of the big hit is the basic effects X1-3, 1-6, 1 at the time of the loss. More than the total number (11) of the determination values S3 assigned to −9, and as described above, the high expectation reach effect is more easily selected at the big hit than at the loss.

  After determining the basic effect, the CPU 431 proceeds to step S20004-4-2 and executes a hold effect determination process. The hold effect is to display a predetermined hold image in the hold image display area in the image display unit 104 as a hold image indicating that the right of special figure determination as a pre-determination target is held. This is an effect using a reserved image including an effect of displaying a predetermined right image in the right image display area in the image display unit 104 as a right image indicating that the right of special figure determination has been digested. As the reserved image and the rights image, one reserved image and one rights image can be selected from the plurality of reserved images and the plurality of rights images.

  The reserved image and the right image to be determined in advance may be the same design or different designs. In addition, when there is a prior hold before the prior determination target, the display position of the hold image corresponding to the prior determination target is shifted each time the right of the special reservation determination of the prior hold is digested. The reserved images displayed at some or all of the display positions may be reserved images with different designs. In these cases, the hold effect includes an effect of changing the hold image to a hold image of a different design and an effect of changing the hold image to a right image of a different design. Hereinafter, the hold image is changed to a hold image of a different design. An effect that changes to a right image is referred to as a pending change effect.

  The plurality of reserved images and the plurality of right images described above are set to different degrees of expectation in which the degree of expectation that the result of determination per special figure included in the pre-determination result of the pre-determination target is a big hit is different for each image.

  FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a reserved image and a right image. The reserved images QC1 to QC3 shown in FIG. 51A are different from each other, and the jackpot expectation degree increases in this order in each reserved image. . Further, the right images PC1 to PC3 shown in FIG. 51B are different from each other, and the jackpot expectation degree increases in this order in each right image. The reserved image QC1 and the right image PC1, the reserved image QC2 and the right image PC2, and the reserved image QC3 and the right image PC3 are set to the same design. Further, the hold image QC1 and the right image PC1 indicate a normal hold image and a normal right image. When the stage flag is set, the image differs for each stage, and as described above, the first stage flag “ When 431 ”is set, a diamond image is displayed. When the second stage flag“ 432 ”is set, a bullet image is displayed. When the third stage flag“ 433 ”is set, a scroll image is displayed. Is done. On the other hand, the reserved images QC2 to QC3 and the right images PC2 to PC3 are common regardless of the stage flag.

  When the hold change effect is executed, the number of times that the hold image can be changed differs depending on the number of the previous hold, so refer to the hold effect content determination table according to the number of the previous hold, Determine the content.

  In FIG. 52, the number of prior suspensions is one, and the suspension effect content determination table for the variable effect pattern TEpF shown in FIG. 49 when the third reference mode flag “43” is set as the reference mode flag. An example is shown. The hold effect content determination table shown in FIG. 52 is stored in the ROM 432. In the hold effect content determination table, a plurality of hold effect patterns that define hold images or rights images to be displayed as hold images or rights images corresponding to prior determination objects in the image display areas PR1, QR1, and QR2 are stored. Each holding effect pattern is configured by being associated with a determination value S4. The image display areas PR1, QR1, QR2, and QR3 and QR4 in the figure are different display areas in the image display unit 104.

  In the hold effect content determination table shown in FIG. 52, the hold image associated with the hold image display area QR2 is determined when the hold effect is determined for the advance determination target (for the player, the start opening 105 that has been the cause of the advance determination target). The reserved image displayed in the reserved image display area QR2 at the time of winning the game ball with respect to the reserved image, and the reserved image associated with the reserved image display area QR1 The reserved image displayed in the reserved image display area QR1 is displayed, and the rights image associated with the rights image display area PR1 is displayed in the rights image display area PR1 when the right of the special figure determination to be determined in advance is digested. The right image to be displayed. The image display area corresponding to the prior determination target is sequentially shifted with the image display areas QR1 and PR1 when the right of prior drawing hold or special determination determination of the prior determination target is digested, and corresponds to the image display areas QR1 and PR1. The attached reserved image and right image are images displayed at the time of shifting.

  In the hold effect Y-1, the hold image QC1 is displayed in the image display area QR2, and the hold image QC1 is displayed and shifted to the image display area QR1 when the right of special drawing determination for pre-holding is displayed. This is a hold effect in which the right image PC1 is displayed while shifting to the image display region PR1 when the right of determination is consumed. In the hold effect Y-2, the hold image QC1 is displayed in the image display region QR2, and the hold image QC1 is displayed and shifted to the image display region QR1 when the right of special drawing determination for pre-holding is displayed. This is a holding effect in which the right image PC2 is displayed while shifting to the image display region PR1 when the right of determination is consumed. In the hold effect Y-3, the hold image QC1 is displayed in the image display area QR2, and the hold image QC2 is displayed while shifting to the image display area QR1 when the special figure determination of the advance hold is performed. This is a holding effect in which the right image PC2 is displayed while shifting to the image display region PR1 when the right of determination is consumed. In the hold effect Y-4, the hold image QC2 is displayed in the image display area QR2, and the hold image QC2 is displayed while shifting to the image display area QR1 when the special figure determination of the advance hold is performed. This is a holding effect in which the right image PC2 is displayed while shifting to the image display region PR1 when the right of determination is consumed. In the hold effect Y-5, the hold image QC1 is displayed in the image display area QR2, and the hold image QC1 is displayed while shifting to the image display area QR1 when the special figure determination of the advance hold is performed. This is a hold effect in which the right image PC3 is displayed while shifting to the image display region PR1 when the right of determination is consumed. In the hold effect Y-6, the hold image QC1 is displayed in the image display area QR2, and the hold image QC2 is displayed while shifting to the image display area QR1 when the right of special drawing determination for the advance hold is consumed, and the special figure to be determined in advance. This is a hold effect in which the right image PC3 is displayed while shifting to the image display region PR1 when the right of determination is consumed. In the hold effect Y-7, the hold image QC1 is displayed in the image display region QR2, and the hold image QC3 is displayed while shifting to the image display region QR1 when the right of special drawing determination for pre-holding is used. This is a hold effect in which the right image PC3 is displayed while shifting to the image display region PR1 when the right of determination is consumed. In the hold effect Y-8, the hold image QC2 is displayed in the image display area QR2, and the hold image QC2 is displayed and shifted to the image display area QR1 when the right of special drawing determination of the advance hold is consumed. This is a hold effect in which the right image PC3 is displayed while shifting to the image display region PR1 when the right of determination is consumed. In the hold effect Y-9, the hold image QC2 is displayed in the image display region QR2, and the hold image QC3 is displayed while shifting to the image display region QR1 at the time of digesting the right of the special drawing determination for the advance hold, and the special image to be preliminarily determined. This is a hold effect in which the right image PC3 is displayed while shifting to the image display region PR1 when the right of determination is consumed. In the hold effect Y-10, the hold image QC3 is displayed in the image display area QR2, and the hold image QC3 is displayed and shifted to the image display area QR1 when the right of special drawing determination for pre-holding is displayed. This is a hold effect in which the right image PC3 is displayed while shifting to the image display region PR1 when the right of determination is consumed.

  53 to 56 show examples of hold effects, and the hold effects in FIGS. 53 to 56 correspond to the hold effects Y-6 and Y-8 to Y-10 shown in FIG. 52, respectively. In FIGS. 53 to 56, (a) corresponds to a pre-determined object at the time of determining the hold effect for the pre-determined object (when a player wins a game ball with respect to the start opening 105 that has become a cause of the pre-determined object for the player). It is a figure which shows the state by which the hold image to be displayed was displayed on hold image display area QR2, (b) is a hold image corresponding to a prior judgment object after the right of special figure determination of a prior hold is digested It is a figure which shows the state displayed on area | region QR1, (c) is a right image corresponding to a prior determination object being displayed in the right image display area PR1 when the right of special figure determination of a prior determination object is digested. FIG.

  The hold effect is determined based on the fourth effect random number and the determination value S4. The fourth effect random number takes any integer value in the numerical range “0 to 299”. Referring to FIG. 52, when the result of determination per special figure included in the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination target is a loss, a determination value of “0 to 245” is assigned to hold effect Y-1. ing. Further, a determination value of “246 to 259” is assigned to the hold effect Y-2. A determination value of “260 to 273” is assigned to the hold effect Y-3. Further, a determination value of “274 to 287” is assigned to the hold effect Y-4. A determination value of “288 to 289” is assigned to the hold effect Y-5. A determination value of “290 to 291” is assigned to the hold effect Y-6. Further, a determination value of “292 to 293” is assigned to the hold effect Y-7. A determination value of “294 to 295” is assigned to the hold effect Y-8. In addition, a determination value of “296 to 297” is assigned to the hold effect Y-9. A determination value of “298 to 299” is assigned to the hold effect Y-10. If the fourth effect random number matches one of the determination values of “0 to 245”, the hold effect Y-1 is selected, and if it matches the determination value of “246 to 259”, When the hold effect Y-2 is selected and matches one of the determination values of “260 to 273”, the hold effect Y-3 is selected and matches with one of the determination values of “274 to 287” When the hold effect Y-4 is selected and matches any of the determination values of “288 to 289”, the hold effect Y-5 is selected and matches with any of the determination values of “290 to 291” In this case, when the hold effect Y-6 is selected and coincides with one of the determination values “292 to 293”, the hold effect Y-7 is selected and one of the determination values “294 to 295” is selected. If they match, the hold effect Y-8 is selected. If it matches with any of the determination values of “296 to 297”, the hold effect Y-9 is selected, and if it matches with any of the determination values of “298 to 299”, it is the hold effect Y-10. Is selected.

  On the other hand, when the result of determination per special figure included in the prior determination result of the prior determination target is a big hit, a determination value of “0 to 24” is assigned to the hold effect Y-1. A determination value of “25 to 49” is assigned to the hold effect Y-2. A determination value of “50 to 74” is assigned to the hold effect Y-3. A determination value of “75 to 94” is assigned to the hold effect Y-4. In addition, a determination value of “95 to 129” is assigned to the hold effect Y-5. A determination value of “130 to 164” is assigned to the hold effect Y-6. In addition, a determination value of “165 to 199” is assigned to the hold effect Y-7. A determination value of “200 to 234” is assigned to the hold effect Y-8. A determination value of “235 to 269” is assigned to the hold effect Y-9. A determination value of “270 to 299” is assigned to the hold effect Y-10. If the fourth effect random number matches one of the determination values of “0 to 24”, the hold effect Y-1 is selected, and if it matches one of the determination values of “25 to 49”, When the hold effect Y-2 is selected and matches any of the determination values of “50 to 74”, the hold effect Y-3 is selected and matches with any of the determination values of “75 to 94” If the hold effect Y-4 is selected and matches any of the determination values of “95 to 129”, the hold effect Y-5 is selected and matches with any of the determination values of “130 to 164” In this case, when the hold effect Y-6 is selected and matches any of the determination values of “165 to 199”, the hold effect Y-7 is selected and one of the determination values of “200 to 234” is selected. If they match, the hold effect Y-8 is selected and “235” is selected. 269 "if they match with any of the determination values of the pending effect Y-9 is selected," if they match with any of the determination values of 270 to 299 ", the hold effect Y-10 is selected.

  With this configuration, when lost, the total number (12) of determination values S4 assigned to the holding effects Y-5 to Y-10 whose right image is PC3, and the holding effects Y-2 to Y2 to which the right image is PC2. The total number (42) of determination values S4 assigned to Y-4 and the number (245) of determination values S4 assigned to the hold effect Y-1 whose rights image is PC1 are large in this order. Therefore, at the time of losing, a rights image with a lower expectation degree of jackpot is likely to be displayed in the rights image display region PR1. On the other hand, at the time of the big hit, the number (25) of determination values S4 assigned to the holding effect Y-1 whose right image is PC1, and the holding effects Y-2 to Y-4 whose right image is PC2. The total number of determination values S4 (70) and the total number of determination values S4 (205) assigned to the holding effects Y-5 to Y-10 whose rights image is PC3 are large in this order. In some cases, a right image with a higher expectation degree of jackpot is likely to be displayed in the right image display region PR1.

  In addition, the total number (262) of determination values S4 assigned to the holding effects Y-1, Y-4, and Y-10 in which the holding change effect is not executed at the time of losing is the holding effect in which the holding change effect is executed. More than the total number (38) of determination values S4 assigned to Y-2 to Y-3, Y-5 to Y-9, and the hold change effect is difficult to be executed at the time of a loss. On the other hand, at the time of the big hit, the total number (225) of the determination values S4 assigned to the holding effects Y-2 to Y-3 and Y-5 to Y-9 in which the holding change effect is executed is the holding change effect. More than the total number (75) of the determination values S4 assigned to the hold effects Y-1, Y-4, and Y-10 that are not executed, the hold change effect is likely to be executed at the time of the big hit.

  In the present embodiment, one image can be selected from three types of images as the reserved image and the right image, but is not limited to three types. In addition, when the hold change effect is executed, the timing at which the hold change is executed is the time when the special figure determination right is consumed (at the start of the change display of the special symbol), but is not limited to this. The change display of the symbol may be started, or the hold change effect may be executed a plurality of times during one variable display period of the special symbol.

  After determining the hold effect, the CPU 431 proceeds to step S20004-4-3 and executes execution effect suggestion effect execution / non-execution determination processing. An execution effect suggesting effect is a plurality of special decorative symbols (hereinafter, “special decorative symbols” may be described as “special symbols”) suggesting that a predetermined effect is executed in the decorative symbol display area. This is an effect of temporarily stopping display and selecting (specifying) one of the special symbols. After the execution effect suggesting effect is executed, a predetermined effect corresponding to the selected special symbol is executed.

  FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect to be executed and a special symbol associated therewith. The special symbol PD1 is a special symbol suggesting execution of the low expectation reach effect, and is a special symbol suggesting execution of the reach effect corresponding to the special effects B-1 and B-4 described above (see FIG. 50). The special symbol PD2 is a special symbol suggesting execution of the medium expectation degree reach effect, and is a special symbol suggesting execution of the reach effect corresponding to the special effects B-2 and B-5 described above (see FIG. 50). The special symbol PD3 is a special symbol that suggests execution of the high expectation reach effect, and is a special symbol that suggests execution of the reach effect corresponding to the special effects B-3 and B-6 described above (see FIG. 50). The special symbol PD4 is a special symbol that suggests execution of a pseudo-continuous effect, and is a special symbol that suggests execution of a pseudo-continuous effect corresponding to the above-described pseudo-continuous effects A-1 and A-2 (see FIG. 50). The special symbol PD5 is a special symbol suggesting execution of the hold change effect, and suggests execution of the hold change effect corresponding to any of the above-described hold effects Y-2 to Y-3, Y-5 to Y-9. It is a special symbol (see FIG. 52). The special symbol PD6 is a special symbol suggesting execution of a loss effect (an effect indicating that an effect associated with another special symbol is not executed). The special symbol PD7 is in a low-probability gaming state, but the result of the determination per special symbol for any special symbol determination information is a big hit while staying (while changing effects are being executed in that mode or stage) A special symbol suggesting the execution of a mode effect in which a certain degree of expectation is set higher than that in the normal mode, and the execution of the effect in the first reference mode described above (first reference mode execution effect, high expectation mode execution effect) ) (See FIG. 43 (c)). The special symbol PD8 executes a change effect from one stage to another stage with a common expectation that the result of judgment per special figure for the special figure judgment information during stay is a big hit in the normal mode (stage change execution) A special symbol suggesting execution of a change effect from the stage currently being executed to another stage among the first to third stages described above. In the special symbol PD9, the result of the special symbol determination for the special symbol determination information corresponding to the current variation (variation display of the current special symbol) is a big hit, and the special symbol determination result is a short latency probability. If the result of the determination per special figure is a small hit (see FIGS. 5 and 6), the execution of the latent / small hit mode effect (latent / small hit mode execution effect) is suggested. It is a special symbol that suggests execution of a mode effect corresponding to the above-described latent mode (see FIGS. 17 and 18). The special symbol PD10 is used when the result of the special symbol determination for the special symbol determination information corresponding to the current fluctuation is a big hit and the result of the special symbol determination is a probable short hit (see FIGS. 5 and 6). This is a special symbol that suggests execution of the effect of the probability variation mode to be executed, and is a special symbol that suggests execution of the effect in the probability variation mode (probability variation mode execution effect) (see FIGS. 17 and 18). Note that the probability variation mode is a mode that is executed even if the result of the determination per special figure is other than the probability variation short hit, but in the present embodiment, the special symbol PD10 does not execute the jackpot game that opens the big winning opening 109 long. Assume that the probability variation is associated with each short.

  58 and 59 are explanatory diagrams showing aspects of the execution effect suggesting effect in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 58 (a), during the decorative display variation display in the three-column decorative symbol display area, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), in the left column of the three-column decorative symbol display area. The special symbol PD4 suggesting that the pseudo-continuous effect is executed is temporarily stopped. After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (c), the special symbol PD1 that suggests that the low expectation reach effect is executed is temporarily stopped in the right column of the three decorative symbol display areas. After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (a), the special symbol PD3 suggesting that the high expectation reach effect is executed is temporarily stopped in the center column of the display region of the three columns of decorative symbols. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), in the selection effect (FIG. 59 (b), a game) suggesting that any one of the three temporarily stopped special symbols PD1, PD3, PD4 is selected. Until the person presses the effect button 118, three special symbols PD1, PD3, which are temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 59 (c) after the arrow moves between the special symbols, are executed. An effect indicating that one special symbol of PD4 has been selected (in FIG. 59 (c), an effect of causing the special symbol PD4 to stop the arrow in response to a pressing operation of the effect button 118 by the player) is executed. If the special symbol PD4 is selected as shown in FIG. 59 (c), then a pseudo-continuous effect is executed.

  The execution effect suggestion effect execution / non-execution determination process in this step is determined based on the fifth effect random number and the determination value S5. FIG. 60 shows an example of an execution effect suggestion effect execution / non-execution determination table stored in the ROM 432. The fifth effect random number takes any integer value in the numerical range “0 to 299”. In the execution effect suggestion effect execution / non-execution determination table, a determination value of “0 to 279” is assigned to non-execution of the execution effect suggestion effect. In addition, a determination value of “280 to 299” is assigned to the execution of the execution effect suggestion effect including a plurality of execution effect suggestion effect patterns, and more specifically, for the execution effect suggestion effect Z-2-1. A determination value of “280 to 285” is assigned. Also, a determination value of “286” is assigned to the execution effect suggestion effect Z-2-2. In addition, a determination value of “287 to 294” is assigned to the execution effect suggestion effect Z-3-1. Further, a determination value of “295 to 298” is assigned to the execution effect suggestion effect Z-3-2. Also, a determination value of “299” is assigned to the execution effect suggestion effect Z-3-3. When the fifth effect random number matches one of the determination values of “0 to 279”, non-execution of the execution effect suggestion effect is selected, and when it matches one of the determination values of “280 to 285” If execution of the execution effect suggestion effect Z-2-1 is selected and it matches the determination value of “286”, execution of the execution effect suggestion effect Z-2-2 is selected and “287 to 294” is selected. If it matches any of the determination values, execution of the execution effect suggesting effect Z-3-1 is selected, and if it matches any of the determination values of “295 to 298”, the execution effect suggesting effect Z- When execution of 3-2 is selected and the determination value matches “299”, execution of the execution effect suggesting effect Z-3-3 is selected.

  Hereinafter, each execution effect suggestion effect will be described. The execution effect suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 58 and 59 is an effect corresponding to the execution effect suggestion effect Z-3-1, and the execution effect suggestion effect Z-3-1 is a display area of three rows of decorative symbols. In each row, an effect that temporarily stops a special symbol one by one, and includes an effect that includes one special symbol that is associated with an effect that is executed in conjunction with the execution effect suggestion effect among the three special symbols It is. Referring to FIGS. 58 and 59, one special symbol is temporarily stopped one by one in each column of the three decorative symbol display areas, and is executed in conjunction with the execution effect suggesting effect among the three special symbols. There is one special symbol PD4 associated with the pseudo-continuous effect.

  Hereinafter, similarly, another execution effect suggestion effect will be described assuming that the effect executed in conjunction with the execution effect suggestion effect is a pseudo-continuous effect. As shown in FIG. 61, the execution effect suggestion effect Z-2-1 is an effect that temporarily stops the special symbols one by one in each of the two display areas of the three decorative pattern display areas. Of the two special symbols, the effect includes one special symbol associated with the effect executed in conjunction with the execution effect suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 62, the execution effect suggestion effect Z-2-2 is an effect that temporarily stops the special symbols one by one in each of the two display areas of the three decorative display areas. Both of the two special symbols are effects that are special symbols associated with effects that are executed in conjunction with the execution effect suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 63, the execution effect suggestion effect Z-3-2 is an effect that temporarily stops a special symbol one by one in each column of the display area of three decorative symbols. Among them, the effect includes two special symbols associated with the effect executed in conjunction with the execution effect suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 64, the execution effect suggestion effect Z-3-3 is an effect that temporarily stops a special symbol one by one in each column of the display area of three decorative symbols. All are effects that are special symbols associated with effects that are executed in conjunction with the execution effect suggestion effect.

  Execution effect suggestion effects Z-2-2 and Z-3-3 are all the same special symbols that are temporarily stopped, and the player selects the special symbols when these special symbols are temporarily stopped. It is possible to recognize that the effect corresponding to the special symbol is executed before the effect is completed. Then, as can be seen with reference to FIGS. 58 to 59 and FIGS. 61 to 64, the player can select a special symbol associated with the pseudo-continuous effect from the temporarily stopped special symbols. The performance effects suggestion effect Z-3-1 is about 33%, the execution effect suggestion effect Z-2-1 is 50%, the execution effect suggestion effect Z-3-2 is about 66%, and the execution effect suggestion effect Z-. 2-2 and execution effect suggestion effect Z-3-3 increase to 100% in this order, whereas the number of determination values assigned to each execution effect suggestion effect is set to be smaller in this order, It is set to be difficult to select in this order.

  After execution / non-execution determination processing of the execution effect suggestion effect, the CPU 431 proceeds to step S20004-4-4 and determines whether execution of the execution effect suggestion effect is determined in step S20004-4-3. When the execution of the execution effect suggestion effect is determined (Yes in S20004-4-4), the process proceeds to step S20004-4-6, and when the execution effect suggestion effect is determined not to be executed (S20004-4-4). No), the process proceeds to step S20004-4-5.

In step S20004-4-5, the CPU 431 uses the basic effect determined in step S20004-4-1 and the effect including the hold effect determined in 20004-4-2 to digest the right of special figure determination related to the prior determination target. Is stored in the RAM 433 as effect content information indicating the content of the variation effect executed during the variation display of the special symbol based on the. When the variation effect is executed based on the effect content information, the execution effect suggestion effect is not executed.

  In step S20004-4-6, the CPU 431 executes execution effect suggestion effect determination processing. Details of the execution effect suggestion effect determination process will be described later (see FIG. 65). After executing the execution effect suggestion effect determination process, the CPU 431 proceeds to step S20004-4-7, the basic effect determined in step S20004-4-1, the hold effect determined in 20004-4-2, and step S20004-4-. The effect including the execution effect suggestion effect determined in 6 is stored in the RAM 433 as effect content information indicating the content of the change effect executed during the special symbol change display based on the digest of the right of the special figure determination related to the prior determination target. To do. When a variation effect is executed based on the effect content information, an execution effect suggestion effect is executed, and then a predetermined effect is executed in conjunction with the execution effect suggestion effect.

――― Execution production suggestion production decision processing; Fig. 65 ―――
With reference to FIG. 65, the execution effect suggestion effect determination process shown in step S20004-4-6 of FIG. 48 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the contents of the execution effect suggestion effect determination process in the present embodiment. In the execution effect suggestion effect determination process of FIG. 65, the CPU 431 determines a special symbol used for the execution effect suggestion effect.

  In this embodiment, the prior determination target is the special figure determination information corresponding to the right image display region PR1 that is held as the determination target TT with the prior reservation after the start condition is satisfied and then the prior reservation is used. Yes, the result of determination per special figure included in the prior determination result indicates a loss, and in the effect mode control determination process of step S20003 of FIG. 35, the third reference mode flag without stage change is set, and FIG. In the basic effect determining process in step S20004-4-1, execution of basic effect X1-4 (see FIG. 50) is determined as the basic effect, and in the reserved effect determining process in step S20004-4-2 in FIG. As shown in FIG. 48, execution of the hold effect Y-1 (see FIG. 52) is determined. FIG. 65 shows the process of determining the effects shown in FIG. 58 and FIG. 59 assuming that execution of the execution effect suggesting effect Z-3-1 (see FIG. 60) is determined as the execution effect suggesting effect in the execution determining process. This will be described with reference to the flowchart.

  In Step S20004-4-6-1, the CPU 431 specifies an execution effect and proceeds to Step S20004--4-6-2. An execution effect is an effect (specifically, effects associated with the special symbols PD1 to PD4 and PD6 shown in FIG. 57) executed during the variable display of the special symbol to be determined in advance, and the object to be determined in advance. Is an effect (specifically, effects associated with the special symbols PD5 and PD7 to PD10 shown in FIG. 57). In the present specification, when the basic effect includes both the pseudo-continuous effect and the special effect (in the case of the basic effects X1-4 to X1-9 and X2-4 to X2-9 shown in FIG. 50), the pseudo-continuous effect Only the execution effect is specified, and when the basic effect does not include the pseudo-continuous effect but includes the special effect (in the case of the basic effects X1-1 to X1-3 and X2-1 to X2-3 shown in FIG. 50). The special effect is specified as the execution effect. In the present embodiment, the pseudo-continuous effect A-1 is specified as the execution effect with reference to the effect content information determined in advance for the special figure determination information corresponding to the right image display region PR1.

  In Step S20004-4-6-2, the CPU 431 determines one effect from the execution effects as the selection target effect, and proceeds to Step S20004-4-6-3. The selection target effect is an effect to be selected when the selection effect determined in step S20004-4-6-7, which will be described later, is executed. After the execution effect suggesting effect is executed, the execution effect is executed. It is an effect that is actually executed in conjunction with the suggestion effect. When a plurality of execution effects are specified in step S2000-4--4-6-1, one execution effect is determined as the selection target effect. The method for determining a selection target effect from a plurality of execution effects is not particularly limited. For example, it may be determined based on a random number for effects, or a priority is set for each effect, and an effect with a high priority. May be selected. In the case of setting the priority order for each effect, the priority order for each effect may be set differently depending on the prior determination result of the prior determination target. In the present embodiment, the pseudo-continuous effect A-1 is determined as the selection target effect.

  In step S20004-4-6-3, CPU 431 determines whether the execution effect suggestion effect determined to be executed in step S20004-3 of FIG. 48 is execution effect suggestion effect Z-2-2 or Z-3-3. Determine whether or not. If the execution effect suggestion effect determined to be executed is not the execution effect suggestion effect Z-2-2 or Z-3-3 (No in step S20004-4-6-3), the process proceeds to step S20004-4-6-4. If the execution effect suggestion effect that has been determined to proceed is determined to be the execution effect suggestion effect Z-2-2 or Z-3-3 (Yes in step S2000-4-4-6-3), all special temporarily stopped Since the symbol becomes a special symbol associated with the selection target effect and there is no need to determine a selection non-target effect described later, the process proceeds to step S2000-4-4-6-6. As described above, the execution effect suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 58 and 59 is an effect corresponding to the execution of the execution effect suggestion effect Z-3-1, and the execution of Z-3-1 is determined as the execution effect suggestion effect. Therefore, the process proceeds to step S20004-4-6-4.

  In step S2000-4-4-6-4, CPU 431 determines one or two effects as selected non-target effects according to the execution effect suggestion effect to be executed, and proceeds to step S20004-4-6-5. The selection non-target effect is an effect that is not a target to be selected when the selection effect determined in step S2000-4-4-6-7 described later is executed, and is associated with the special symbols PD1 to PD10. Among the effects, the effects excluding the selection target effect determined in step S2000-4-4-2. If the execution effect suggestion effect to be executed is the execution effect suggestion effect Z-2-1 or Z-3-2, one selected non-target effect is determined, and the execution effect suggestion effect to be executed is the execution effect suggestion effect Z. If it is -3-1, 2 selection non-target effects are determined. As described above, in the present embodiment, since execution of Z-3-1 is determined as the execution effect suggestion effect, two selection non-target effects are determined.

  The method for determining the selection non-target effect is not particularly limited. For example, the selection non-target effect may be determined based on a random number for the effect, or the selection non-target effect may be determined in advance according to the selection target effect. Also good. Moreover, it is good also as determining multiple combinations of the selection non-target production according to selection object production, and based on the random number for production. In this embodiment, the low expectation degree reach effect (special effect B-1) and the high expectation degree reach effect (special effect B-3) are determined as the selection non-target effects.

  In Step S20004-4-6-5, the CPU 431 special symbols associated with the selection target effect determined in Step S20004-4-6-2 and the selection non-target effect determined in Step S20004-4-6-4. (In this embodiment, special symbols PD1, PD3, and PD4) are set as special symbols used for the execution effect suggesting effect. In addition, the CPU 431 sets in which decorative symbol display area each special symbol is temporarily stopped. In the present embodiment, the special symbols PD4, PD3, and PD1 are set to be temporarily stopped at the left column, the center column, and the right column in the three columns of decorative symbol display areas. When the process proceeds to step S20004-4-6-6, the CPU 431 uses the special symbol associated with the selection target effect determined in step S20004-4-6-2 as a special symbol used for the execution effect suggestion effect. Set as. At the same time, the CPU 431 sets in which decorative symbol display area each special symbol is temporarily stopped (sets the same special symbol to be temporarily stopped in a predetermined decorative symbol display area).

  After the processing of step S20004-4-6-5 or step S20004-4-6-6, the process proceeds to step S20004-4-6-7, and the CPU 431 determines the selection effect. The selection effect is an effect that causes the player to recognize the process until the special symbol associated with the selection target effect is selected (specified) among the temporarily stopped special symbols. As described above, the selection target effect is determined in step S20004-4-6-1, and it is already determined which special symbol is finally selected, but which special symbol is selected. The performance of the game is improved by performing an effect that is uncertain.

  The selection effect may be an effect in which the player is requested to operate the effect button 118 and one special symbol is selected in a manner corresponding to the operation state, or the player operates the effect button 118. There may be an effect in which one special symbol is selected without requesting. The selection effect shown in FIG. 59B requests the player to press the effect button 118 within the operation effective period of the effect button 118, and the effect button 118 is pressed within the operation effective period. In such a case, an effect (the effect shown in FIGS. 59B and 59C) in which the special symbol PD4 is selected in accordance with the pressing timing is executed, and the effect button 118 is not pressed within the operation effective period. In such a case, after the operation effective period has elapsed, an effect of selecting the special symbol PD4 is executed.

  In this step, the CPU 431 also determines the timing for executing the selection effect. The execution timing of the selection effect in which the special symbol PD4 is selected is before the pseudo-continuous effect is executed.

  As a first modification of the present embodiment, a case will be described in which execution execution suggestion effect Z-2-1 is determined in step S20004-4-3 in FIG. In this modification, the pseudo-continuous effect is determined as the selection target effect, and the low expectation reach effect or the high expectation reach effect is determined as the selection non-target effect. Then, a selection effect in which the special symbol PD4 is selected from the special symbol PD4 associated with the selection target effect and the special symbol PD1 or PD3 associated with the selection non-target effect is executed. As a special symbol, a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as a special symbol PD11) that is comprehensively associated with an unspecified special effect (special effects B-1 to B-3, etc.) is set. In this case, an unspecified special effect can be determined as the selection non-target effect. When applied to this modification, an unspecified special effect is determined as a selection non-target effect, and the special symbol PD4 associated with the selection target effect and the special symbol PD11 associated with the selection non-target effect. A selection effect in which the special symbol PD4 is selected is executed (see FIG. 66).

  As a second modification of the present embodiment, a case will be described in which execution of the basic effect X1-1 is determined as the basic effect in the basic effect determination process in step S20004-4-1 of FIG. In this modification, the low expectation reach effect is determined as the selection target effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect and the high expectation reach effect are determined as the selection non-target effects. Then, a selection effect in which the special symbol PD1 is selected from the special symbol PD1 associated with the selection target effect and the special symbols PD3 and PD4 associated with the selection non-target effect is executed (see FIG. 67). In that case, the execution timing of the selection effect is before the low expectation reach effect is executed.

  When the content of the effect is not determined in advance for the special determination information corresponding to the right image display area PR1, the execution effect suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 65 is executed during the effect start process shown in step S20007 of FIG. May be. As a third modified example of the present embodiment, a case will be described in which execution of a loss effect is determined as a selection target effect in the execution effect suggestion effect determination process executed in step S20007 of FIG. In this modified example, the lose effect is determined as the selection target effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect and the unspecified special effect are determined as the selection non-target effects. Then, a selection effect in which the special symbol PD6 is selected from the special symbol PD6 associated with the selection target effect and the special symbols PD4 and PD11 associated with the non-selection effect is executed (see FIG. 68). In this case, the execution timing of the selection effect is not particularly limited, but is set, for example, immediately before the special symbol variable display is stopped.

  According to the present embodiment, the special game determination means for performing the special game determination as to whether or not the special game is to be performed when the start condition is satisfied, and a plurality of effects by the effect symbol display means based on the result of the special game determination Effect control means for displaying the symbols after variably displaying, and the effect control means for temporarily stopping and displaying at least two effect symbols after variably displaying the plurality of effect symbols; After the two or more effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, a special effect suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high after performing the pseudo-continuous effect for variably displaying the two or more effect symbols again. Pseudo-continuous effect control means to be performed, special effect control means to perform the special effect without performing the pseudo-continuous effect after the two or more effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the two or more effect symbols A special effect control means for performing a special effect using the two or more effect symbols when the temporary stop is displayed, and the temporary stop means suggests that at least the pseudo-continuous effect is performed. The first special symbol to be performed or the second special symbol suggesting that the special effect is to be performed without performing the pseudo-continuous effect can be temporarily stopped and displayed, When an effect is performed, after both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, it is possible to cause the first special effect to specify the first special symbol, When the special effect is performed without performing the pseudo-continuous effect, the second special symbol is specified after the first special symbol and the second special symbol are both temporarily stopped and displayed. Making a special performance Possible it is. The special game determination means corresponds to the main control unit 401 that performs a big hit lottery with reference to FIG. The effect control means corresponds to the effect control unit 403 that displays a predetermined background image on the image display unit 104 with reference to FIG. 4 and FIG. The special effect corresponds to an execution effect suggesting effect in the specification.

  According to this configuration, at least the first special symbol indicating that the pseudo-continuous effect is performed and the second special symbol indicating that the special effect (reach effect) is performed are temporarily stopped and displayed. When an effect in which a special symbol is specified (selected) is executed, a first special symbol is specified and a pseudo-continuous effect is executed, and an effect in which a second special symbol is specified (selected) is executed The second special symbol is specified and the special effect is executed. Therefore, the player can recognize that an effect associated with one of the special symbols is executed when a plurality of special symbols are temporarily stopped. Interest can be aroused, so the fun of gaming is improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the effect control unit performs a lose effect that causes a lost effect in which neither the pseudo-continuous effect nor the special effect is performed after the two or more effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed. The special effect control means has a control means, and when the loss effect is performed, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are temporarily displayed after both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. A third special effect that does not specify any of the second special symbols can be performed.

  According to the configuration, after the special symbol including the special symbol associated with the pseudo-continuous effect and the special effect is temporarily stopped and displayed, neither of the special symbols associated with the pseudo-continuous effect and the special effect is specified. Is executed, the loss effect is executed. More specifically, after the special symbol associated with the pseudo-rendition effect, the special symbol associated with the special effect, and the special symbol associated with the lost effect are temporarily stopped and displayed, When the effect that specifies the associated special symbol is executed, the loss effect is executed.

  The flowchart (FIG. 35, KF2, KF13, KF14, and KF31) used to describe the present embodiment is also applied to the following second to sixth embodiments. In each of the following embodiments, the first embodiment is applied. A description of the same parts as those in FIG.

/// Second embodiment ///
The execution effect suggesting effect of the first embodiment includes a special symbol associated with the pseudo-continuous effect and a special symbol associated with the special effect as a special symbol to be temporarily stopped in the display area of the decorative symbol. The symbol is determined, and the effect associated with the special symbol selected (specified) by the selection effect is to be executed after the execution effect suggestion effect. The execution effect suggesting effect of the present embodiment includes a special symbol associated with the special effect and a special symbol associated with the pre-reading effect as a special symbol to be temporarily stopped in the display area of the decorative symbol. A case of determination will be described. In addition, in this specification, a non-special effect is an effect that is not a special effect, and by temporarily stopping different decorative symbols in two rows of decorative symbol display regions among three rows of decorative symbol display regions, In the remaining one row of the decorative symbol display area, the effect is that no ornamental symbol is displayed even if any decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. In this embodiment, the pre-reading effect is a reserved change effect or a high expectation mode execution effect, which is an effect that is executed at the start of the next change (a special symbol change display that starts after the end of the current change). This is an effect that is executed after the variation display of the special symbol of the current variation is stopped (after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a break).

  FIG. 69 and FIG. 70 are explanatory diagrams showing aspects of the execution effect suggesting effect in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 69 (a), during the decorative display variation display in the three-column decorative symbol display area, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), in the left column of the three-column decorative symbol display area. The special symbol PD5 suggesting that the hold change effect is executed is temporarily stopped. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69 (c), the special symbol PD1 indicating that the low expectation reach effect is executed is temporarily stopped in the right column of the three decorative symbol display areas. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70 (a), the special symbol PD3 suggesting that the high expectation reach effect is executed is temporarily stopped in the center column of the display region of the three columns of decorative symbols. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), it is suggested that one of the three special symbols PD1, PD3, and PD5 temporarily stopped (the special symbol PD5 in this embodiment) is excluded from the options. After the selection effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 70 (c), the special symbol PD1 is selected from the three special symbols PD1, PD3, and PD5 temporarily stopped (the special symbol PD3 is added in addition to the special symbol PD5). An effect indicating that it has been excluded from the options is executed. When the special symbol PD1 is selected as shown in FIG. 70 (c), the low expectation reach effect is executed thereafter.

  Hereinafter, the execution effect suggestion effect determination process in the present embodiment will be described along the flowchart of FIG. In the present embodiment, the right of special figure determination is reserved for the prior determination target when the start condition is satisfied, and then for the special figure determination corresponding to the right image display region PR1 that has become the determination target TT with the digestion of the prior reservation. The result of the judgment per special figure included in the pre-judgment result indicates a loss, and in the effect mode control judgment process in step S20003 in FIG. 35, the third reference mode flag without stage change is set. In the basic effect determining process in step S20004-4-1 in 48, execution of the basic effect X1-1 (see FIG. 50) is determined as the basic effect, and in the pending effect determining process in step S20004-4-2 in FIG. The execution of the hold effect Y-1 is determined as the hold effect, and the execution effect suggestion effect execution / non-execution decision of step S20004-4-3 in FIG. 48 is determined. In the process, the execution of the demonstration execution as an execution effect suggested effect suggests rendering Z-3-1 (see FIG. 60) is assumed to have been determined.

  In Step S20004-4-6-1, the CPU 431 specifies an execution effect and proceeds to Step S20004--4-6-2. In the present embodiment, as the execution effect, the special effect B-1 is specified with reference to the effect content information determined in advance for the special figure determination information corresponding to the right image display region PR1.

  In Step S20004-4-6-2, the CPU 431 determines one effect from the execution effects as the selection target effect, and proceeds to Step S20004-4-6-3. In the present embodiment, the special effect B-1 is determined as the selection target effect.

  In step S2000-4-4-6-3, CPU 431 determines whether or not the execution effect suggestion effect to be executed is execution effect suggestion effect Z-2-2 or Z-3-3. If the execution effect suggestion effect to be executed is not the execution effect suggestion effect Z-2-2 or Z-3-3 (No in step S20004-4-6-3), the process proceeds to step S20004-4-6-4. If the execution effect suggestion effect determined to be executed is the execution effect suggestion effect Z-2-2 or Z-3-3, the process proceeds to step S20004-4-6-6. In this embodiment, since execution of Z-3-1 is determined as an execution effect suggestion effect, the process proceeds to step S20004-4-6-4.

  In step S2000-4-4-6-4, CPU 431 determines one or two effects as selected non-target effects according to the execution effect suggestion effect to be executed, and proceeds to step S20004-4-6-5. In this embodiment, since execution of Z-3-1 is determined as the execution effect suggestion effect, the pending change effect and the high expectation reach effect are determined as the selection non-target effects as the two selection non-target effects. .

  In Step S20004-4-6-5, the CPU 431 special symbols associated with the selection target effect determined in Step S20004-4-6-2 and the selection non-target effect determined in Step S20004-4-6-4. (In this embodiment, special symbols PD1, PD3, and PD5) are set as special symbols used for the execution effect suggesting effect. In addition, the CPU 431 sets in which decorative symbol display area each special symbol is temporarily stopped. In the present embodiment, the special symbols PD5, PD3, and PD1 are set to be temporarily stopped in the left column, the center column, and the right column in the three columns of decorative symbol display areas.

  After the process of step S20004-4-6-5, the process proceeds to step S20004-4-6-7, and the CPU 431 determines the selection effect. In the present embodiment, as the selection effect, the execution of the effect in which the special symbols PD5 and PD3 associated with the selected non-target effect are sequentially cut and the special symbol PD1 associated with the selection target effect remains. In this step, the CPU 431 also determines the timing for executing the selection effect. In this embodiment, the execution timing of the selection effect in which the special symbol PD1 is selected is before the execution of the special effect B-1.

  As a first modification of the present embodiment, a case will be described in which execution execution suggestion effect Z-2-1 is determined in step S20004-4-3 in FIG. In this modification, the low expectation reach effect is determined as the selection target effect, and the hold change effect is determined as the non-selection effect. Then, a selection effect in which the special symbol PD1 is selected from the special symbol PD1 associated with the selection target effect and the special symbol PD5 associated with the selection non-target effect is executed. As described above, when the special symbol PD11 comprehensively associated with the unspecified special effects (special effects B-1 to B-3, etc.) is set as the special symbol, the A specific special effect can be determined as a non-selected effect. When applied to this modification, an unspecified special effect is determined as a selection target effect, and a special symbol PD11 associated with the selection target effect and a special symbol 5 associated with the non-selection effect are special. A selection effect in which the symbol PD11 is selected is executed (see FIG. 71).

  As a second modification of the present embodiment, the prior determination target is special figure determination information corresponding to the reserved figure display area QR2, and the determination result per special figure included in the preliminary determination result indicates a loss, In the effect mode control determination process in step S20003, the third reference mode flag without stage change is set, and in the basic effect determination process in step S20004-4-1 in FIG. 48, the basic effect X1-1 ( The execution of the hold effect Y-6 (see FIG. 52) is determined as the hold effect in the hold effect determination process of step S20004-4-2 of FIG. 48, and step S20004 of FIG. 48 is determined. In the execution effect suggestion effect execution / non-execution determination process of -4--3, the execution effect suggestion effect Z-3-1 (FIG. 60) is executed as the execution effect suggestion effect. Be described as the execution of irradiation) was determined. In the present modification, it is assumed that the effect contents are not determined in advance for the special figure determination information corresponding to the right image display area PR1 and the reserved image display area QR1. In this modification, the hold change effect included in the hold effect Y-6 is determined as the selection target effect, and the low expectation reach effect and the high expectation reach effect are determined as the selection non-target effects. Then, a selection effect in which the special symbol PD5 is selected from the special symbol PD5 associated with the selection target effect and the special symbols PD1 and PD3 associated with the selection non-target effect is executed (see FIG. 72). In that case, the execution timing of the selection effect is executed as a hold change effect (effect in which the hold image QC1 displayed in the hold image display area QR2 is shifted to the hold image display area QR1 and changed to the hold image QC2). Before.

  As a third modification of the present embodiment, the prior determination target is special figure determination information corresponding to the reserved figure display region QR2, and the determination result per special figure included in the preliminary determination result indicates a loss, In the effect mode control determination process in step S20003, a setting reservation for setting the first reference mode flag is made after the end of the current fluctuation. In the basic effect determination process in step S20004-4-1 in FIG. The basic effect determined with reference to the basic mode basic effect content determination table (not shown, the same applies hereinafter) is determined, and is held as the hold effect in the hold effect determining process in step S20004-4-2 in FIG. The execution of the effect Y-1 (see FIG. 52) is determined, and the execution effect suggestion effect execution / non-execution decision in step S20004-4-3 in FIG. In the process, the execution of the execution effect suggested effect Z-3-1 (see FIG. 60) is described as being determined as the execution effect suggested effect. In the present modification, it is assumed that the effect contents are not determined in advance for the special figure determination information corresponding to the right image display area PR1 and the reserved image display area QR1. In this modification, the first reference mode execution effect is determined as the selection target effect, and the low expectation reach effect and the high expectation reach effect are determined as the selection non-target effects. Then, a selection effect in which the special symbol PD7 is selected from the special symbol PD7 associated with the selection target effect and the special symbols PD1 and PD3 associated with the selection non-target effect is executed (see FIG. 73). In that case, the execution timing of the selection effect is before the first reference mode execution effect is executed (that is, before the start of the next fluctuation display).

  When the content of the effect is not determined in advance for the special determination information corresponding to the right image display area PR1, the execution effect suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 65 is executed during the effect start process shown in step S20007 of FIG. May be. As a fourth modified example of the present embodiment, a case will be described in which execution of a loss effect is determined as a selection target effect in the execution effect suggestion effect determination process executed in step S20007 of FIG. In this modification, the loss effect is determined as the selection target effect, and the hold change effect and the low expectation reach execution effect are determined as the selection non-target effects. Then, the selection effect in which the special symbol PD6 is selected from the special symbol PD6 associated with the selection target effect and the special symbols PD5 and PD1 associated with the non-selection effect is executed (see FIG. 74). In this case, the execution timing of the selection effect is not particularly limited, but is set, for example, immediately before the special symbol fluctuation is stopped.

  According to the present embodiment, the special game determination means for performing the special game determination as to whether or not the special game is to be performed when the start condition is satisfied, and a plurality of effects by the effect symbol display means based on the result of the special game determination. An effect control means for displaying the symbols after being variably displayed, and a prior determination means for performing a prior determination as to whether or not to perform the special game before the special game determination is performed, the effect control means includes: And a temporary stop means for temporarily stopping and displaying at least two or more effect symbols after the plurality of effect symbols are variably displayed, and after the two or more effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, the degree of expectation for the special game is increased. A special effect control means for performing a special effect suggesting that it is high, and a non-special effect control means for performing a non-special effect that does not perform the special effect after the two or more effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, Above Special effect control means for performing a special effect using the two or more effect symbols when the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the temporary stop means performs at least the special effect. It is possible to temporarily stop display the first special symbol that suggests that the game is to be performed or the second special symbol that suggests that the special game has been determined to be performed in the prior determination. When the special effect is performed, it is possible to cause the first special effect to specify the first special symbol after both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed. And when the non-special effect is performed, after the first special symbol and the second special symbol are both temporarily stopped and displayed, the second special symbol is displayed according to the result of the prior determination. Perform a second special effect to identify It is possible to make. The special game determination means corresponds to the main control unit 401 that performs a big hit lottery with reference to FIG. The effect control means corresponds to the effect control unit 403 that displays a predetermined background image on the image display unit 104 with reference to FIG. 4 and FIG. The prior determination unit corresponds to the main control unit 401 that executes the preliminary determination process with reference to FIG. The special effect corresponds to an execution effect suggesting effect in the specification.

  According to the configuration, at least the first special symbol suggesting that a special effect (reach effect) is performed, and a pre-reading effect is performed after the non-special effect is performed (no special effect is performed). A second special symbol that suggests a temporary stop display. Specifically, the pre-reading effect is a pending change effect or a high expectation mode execution effect. When an effect in which the first special symbol is specified (selected) is executed, the first special symbol is specified. When the special effect is executed and the effect of specifying (selecting) the second special symbol is executed, the pre-reading effect is executed after the second special symbol is specified and the non-special effect is executed. Therefore, the player can recognize that an effect associated with one of the special symbols is executed when a plurality of special symbols are temporarily stopped. Interest can be aroused, so the fun of gaming is improved.

/// Third embodiment ///
The execution effect suggesting effect of the first embodiment includes a special symbol associated with the pseudo-continuous effect and a special symbol associated with the special effect as a special symbol to be temporarily stopped in the display area of the decorative symbol. The symbol is determined, and the effect associated with the special symbol selected (specified) by the selection effect is to be executed after the execution effect suggestion effect. The execution effect suggestion effect of the present embodiment includes a special symbol associated with the special effect and a special symbol associated with the mode / stage execution effect as the special symbols to be temporarily stopped in the display area of the decorative symbols. A case where a special symbol is determined will be described. In the present embodiment, the mode / stage execution effect is the above-described high expectation mode execution effect, stage change execution effect, latent / small hit mode execution effect, probability change mode execution effect, and these are the fluctuation start of the next variation An effect that is sometimes executed, that is, an effect that is executed after the change display of the special symbol of the current change is stopped (after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a broken pattern).

  75 and 76 are explanatory diagrams showing aspects of the execution effect suggesting effect in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 75 (a), during the decorative display variation display in the three-column decorative symbol display area, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), in the left column of the three-column decorative symbol display area. The special symbol PD9 suggesting that the latent / small hit mode execution effect is executed is temporarily stopped. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75 (c), the special symbol PD1 indicating that the low expectation reach effect is executed is temporarily stopped in the right column of the three decorative symbol display areas. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 76 (a), the special symbol PD3 suggesting that the high expectation reach effect is executed is temporarily stopped in the center column of the display region of the three columns of decorative symbols. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 76 (b), after a selection effect is executed that suggests that any one of the three special symbols PD1, PD3, and PD9 temporarily stopped is selected, FIG. As shown in c), an effect indicating that the special symbol PD9 is selected from the three temporarily stopped special symbols PD1, PD3, and PD9 is executed. If the special symbol PD9 is selected as shown in FIG. 76 (c), then the latent / small hit mode execution effect is executed.

  Hereinafter, the execution effect suggestion effect determination process in the present embodiment will be described along the flowchart of FIG. In the present embodiment, the right of the special figure determination is reserved for the prior determination target when the start condition is satisfied, and then for the special figure determination corresponding to the right image display region PR1 that has become the determination target TT due to the digestion of the prior reservation. Information, the determination result per special figure included in the pre-determination result is a big hit, and the special symbol determination result indicates a short-latency hit, and the stage in the effect mode control determination process of step S20003 in FIG. The third reference mode flag that is not changed is set, and in the basic effect determination process of step S20004-4-1 in FIG. The basic performance content determination table can be included in the basic performance content determination table shown in FIG.50. The content is determined, and for example, execution of a basic effect that does not include a pseudo-continuous effect and a special effect is determined. In the hold effect determining process in step S20004-4-2 in FIG. 48, the hold effect Y-1 ( The execution effect suggestion effect Z-3-1 (see FIG. 60) is determined as the execution effect suggestion effect in the execution effect suggestion effect execution / non-execution determination process in step S20004-4-3 of FIG. ) Is determined to be executed.

  In Step S20004-4-6-1, the CPU 431 specifies an execution effect and proceeds to Step S20004--4-6-2. In the present embodiment, as the execution effect, the latent / small hit mode execution effect based on the prior determination result of the special figure determination information corresponding to the right image display region PR1 is specified.

  In Step S20004-4-6-2, the CPU 431 determines one effect from the execution effects as the selection target effect, and proceeds to Step S20004-4-6-3. In the present embodiment, the latent / small hit mode execution effect is determined as the selection target effect.

  In step S2000-4-4-6-3, CPU 431 determines whether or not the execution effect suggestion effect to be executed is execution effect suggestion effect Z-2-2 or Z-3-3. If the execution effect suggestion effect to be executed is not the execution effect suggestion effect Z-2-2 or Z-3-3 (No in step S20004-4-6-3), the process proceeds to step S20004-4-6-4. If the execution effect suggestion effect determined to be executed is the execution effect suggestion effect Z-2-2 or Z-3-3, the process proceeds to step S20004-4-6-6. In this embodiment, since execution of Z-3-1 is determined as an execution effect suggestion effect, the process proceeds to step S20004-4-6-4.

  In step S2000-4-4-6-4, CPU 431 determines one or two effects as selected non-target effects according to the execution effect suggestion effect to be executed, and proceeds to step S20004-4-6-5. In this embodiment, since execution of Z-3-1 is determined as the execution effect suggestion effect, the low expectation reach effect and the high expectation reach effect are selected as the non-selection effects as the two selection non-target effects. decide.

  In Step S20004-4-6-5, the CPU 431 special symbols associated with the selection target effect determined in Step S20004-4-6-2 and the selection non-target effect determined in Step S20004-4-6-4. (In this embodiment, special symbols PD1, PD3, and PD9) are set as special symbols used for the execution effect suggesting effect. In addition, the CPU 431 sets in which decorative symbol display area each special symbol is temporarily stopped. In the present embodiment, the special symbols PD9, PD3, and PD1 are set to be temporarily stopped in the left column, the center column, and the right column in the three columns of decorative symbol display areas.

  After the process of step S20004-4-6-5, the process proceeds to step S20004-4-6-7, and the CPU 431 determines the selection effect. In the present embodiment, as a selection effect, the player is requested to press the effect button 118 within the operation effective period of the effect button 118, and when the effect button 118 is pressed within the operation effective period, the player presses it. When the special symbol associated with the selection target effect is selected in accordance with the timing of the operation and the effect button 118 is not pressed within the operation effective period, it is associated with the selection target effect after the operation effective period has elapsed. An effect in which a special symbol is selected is executed. In this step, the CPU 431 also determines the timing for executing the selection effect. In the present embodiment, the execution timing of the selection effect in which the special symbol PD9 is selected is before the latent / small hit mode execution effect is executed (that is, before the start of the next fluctuation display).

  The execution effect suggesting effect of the present embodiment is the same effect even when the result of determination per special figure included in the preliminary determination result for the special figure determination information corresponding to the right image display area PR1 indicates a small hit. It is feasible.

  As a first modification of the present embodiment, a case will be described in which execution execution suggestion effect Z-2-1 is determined in step S20004-4-3 in FIG. In this modification, the latent / small hit mode execution effect is determined as the selection target effect, and the low expectation reach effect or the high expectation reach effect is determined as the selection non-target effect. Then, a selection effect in which the special symbol PD9 is selected from the special symbol PD9 associated with the selection target effect and the special symbol PD1 or PD3 associated with the selection non-target effect is executed. As described above, when the special symbol PD11 comprehensively associated with the unspecified special effects (special effects B-1 to B-3, etc.) is set as the special symbol, the A specific special effect can be determined as a non-selected effect. When applied to this modification, an unspecified special effect is determined as a selection non-target effect, and a special symbol PD9 associated with the selection target effect and a special symbol PD11 associated with the selection non-target effect. A selection effect in which the special symbol PD9 is selected is executed (see FIG. 77).

  As a second modification of the present embodiment, the prior determination target corresponds to the right image display region PR1 that is reserved for the right of special figure determination when the start condition is satisfied and then becomes the determination target TT with the digestion of the prior reservation. Setting of the third reference mode flag without stage change in the effect mode control determination process of step S20003 in FIG. 48, the execution of the basic effect X1-1 (see FIG. 50) is determined as the basic effect in the basic effect determination process of step S20004-4-1 of FIG. 48, and the hold effect of step S20004-4-2 of FIG. In the determination process, the execution of the holding effect Y-1 is determined as the holding effect, and the execution effect suggesting effect execution / non-execution of step S20004-4-3 in FIG. In line determination process, execution of execution effect suggested effect Z-3-1 is assumed to have been determined as the execution effect suggested effect. In this modification, the low expectation reach effect is determined as the selection target effect, and the latent / small hit mode execution effect and the high expectation reach effect are determined as the selection non-target effects. Then, a selection effect in which the special symbol PD1 is selected from the special symbol PD1 associated with the selection target effect and the special symbols PD3 and PD9 associated with the selection non-target effect is executed (see FIG. 78). In that case, the execution timing of the selection effect is before the low expectation reach effect is executed.

  As a third modification of the present embodiment, the result of the special figure determination included in the result of the pre-determination process for the special figure determination information corresponding to the right image display region PR1 is a jackpot and the result of the special figure determination Indicates the probability variation short hit, and in the effect mode control determination process of step S20003 in FIG. 35, the third reference mode flag is set without changing the stage, and in the basic effect determination process in step S20004-4-1 of FIG. , Based on the basic effect content determination table dedicated to the probability variation short (not shown, the basic effect content determination table dedicated to the probability variation short time can be included in the basic effect content determination table shown in FIG. 50. The same applies to the following embodiments). 48 is determined, for example, execution of a basic effect that does not include pseudo-continuous effects and special effects is determined. In the hold effect determination process in step S20004-4-2, execution of the hold effect Y-1 (see FIG. 52) is determined as the hold effect, and execution effect suggestion effect execution / non-execution in step S20004-4-3 in FIG. In the determination process, it is assumed that execution of the execution effect suggestion effect Z-3-1 (see FIG. 60) is determined as the execution effect suggestion effect. In this modification, the probability variation mode execution effect is determined as the selection target effect, and the low expectation reach effect and the high expectation reach effect are determined as the selection non-target effects. Then, a selection effect in which the special symbol PD10 is selected from the special symbol PD10 associated with the selection target effect and the special symbols PD1 and PD3 associated with the non-selection effect is executed (see FIG. 79). In this case, the execution timing of the selection effect is before the probability variation mode execution effect is executed (that is, before the start of the next fluctuation display).

  As a fourth modified example of the present embodiment, the prior determination target is special figure determination information corresponding to the reserved image display area QR2, and the determination result per special figure included in the preliminary determination result indicates a loss, and FIG. In the effect mode control determination process in step S20003, a setting reservation for setting the first reference mode flag is made after the end of the fluctuation display of the current fluctuation. In the basic effect determination process in step S20004-4-1 in FIG. The basic effect determined with reference to the basic effect content determination table for 1 standard mode is determined, and the hold effect Y-6 (see FIG. 52) is determined as the hold effect in the hold effect determining process in step S20004-4-2 in FIG. ) Is determined, and the execution of the execution effect suggestion effect Z-3-1 is determined as the execution effect suggestion effect. In addition, it is assumed that the effect contents are not determined in advance for the special figure determination information corresponding to the right symbol display area PR1 and the reserved image display area QR1. In this modification, the first reference mode execution effect is determined as the selection target effect, and the low expectation reach effect and the high expectation reach effect are determined as the selection non-target effects. Then, a selection effect is executed in which the special symbol PD7 is selected from the special symbol PD7 associated with the selection target effect and the special symbols PD1 and PD3 associated with the selection non-target effect (see FIG. 80). In that case, the execution timing of the selection effect is before the first reference mode execution effect is executed (that is, before the start of the next fluctuation display).

  As a fifth modified example of the present embodiment, the advance determination target is special figure determination information corresponding to the reserved image display area QR1, and the determination result per special figure included in the advance determination result indicates a loss, which is illustrated in FIG. In the effect mode control determination process in step S20003, the third reference mode flag is set and a setting reservation for setting the second stage mode flag is made after the end of the current fluctuation display (that is, the current stage is the first stage). In step S20004-4-1 in FIG. 48, the basic effect X1-1 (see FIG. 50) is determined to be executed as the basic effect, and step S20004-4-2 in FIG. 48 is suspended. In the effect determination process, for example, the reserved image area is based on a reserved effect content determination table (not shown) for zero prior reservation as the hold effect. The hold image QC1 is displayed in R1, and the hold effect for displaying the right image PR1 in the right image display region PR1 is determined. In the execution effect suggestion effect execution / non-execution determination process in step S20004-4-3 in FIG. The case where execution of the execution effect suggestion effect Z-3-1 is determined as the execution effect suggestion effect will be described. It is assumed that the effect content is not determined in advance for the special figure determination information corresponding to the right symbol display area PR1. In this modification, the stage change execution effect is determined as the selection target effect, and the low expectation reach effect and the high expectation reach effect are determined as the selection non-target effects. Then, a selection effect in which the special symbol PD8 is selected from the special symbol PD8 associated with the selection target effect and the special symbols PD1 and PD3 associated with the selection non-target effect is executed (see FIG. 81). In this case, the execution timing of the selection effect is before the stage change execution effect is executed (that is, before the start of the next fluctuation display).

  When the content of the effect is not determined in advance for the special determination information corresponding to the right image display area PR1, the execution effect suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 65 is executed during the effect start process shown in step S20007 of FIG. May be. As a sixth modified example of the present embodiment, a case will be described in which execution of a loss effect is determined as a selection target effect in the execution effect suggestion effect determination process executed in step S20007 of FIG. In this modification, the loss effect is determined as the selection target effect, and the latent / small hit mode execution effect and the unspecified reach effect are determined as the selection non-target effects. Then, a selection effect is executed in which the special symbol PD6 is selected from the special symbol PD6 associated with the selection target effect and the special symbols PD9 and PD11 associated with the selection non-target effect (see FIG. 82). In this case, the execution timing of the selection effect is not particularly limited, but is set, for example, immediately before the special symbol fluctuation is stopped.

  According to the present embodiment, the special game determination means for performing the special game determination as to whether or not the special game is to be performed when the start condition is satisfied, and a plurality of effects by the effect symbol display means based on the result of the special game determination. Effect control means for displaying the symbols in a variable manner and then stopping the display. The effect control means sets one of the effect modes among the plurality of effect modes, and is currently set when a predetermined condition is satisfied. An effect mode setting means for shifting from the effect mode to another effect mode, and when a predetermined effect mode is set, at least two effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed after the plurality of effect symbols are variably displayed. Temporary stop means, special effect control means for performing a special effect suggesting that the degree of expectation for the special game is high after the two or more effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, When two or more effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, the non-special effect control means for performing a non-special effect that does not perform the special effect, and when the two or more effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, Special effect control means for performing a special effect using two or more effect symbols, and the temporary stop means transitions to the first special symbol or the effect mode that suggests that at least the special effect is performed. It is possible to temporarily stop and display the second special symbol that suggests that the special special effect control means, when the special special effect is performed, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. After the temporary stop display, it is possible to perform a first special effect that identifies the first special symbol, and when the non-special effect is performed, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. Any of these are temporary It is possible to perform a second special effect for specifying the second special symbol after the stop display is performed, and the effect mode setting means sets the current special setting after the second special effect is performed. It is possible to shift from the presenting production mode to another production mode. The special game determination means corresponds to the main control unit 401 that performs a big hit lottery with reference to FIG. The effect control means corresponds to the effect control unit 403 that displays a predetermined background image on the image display unit 104 with reference to FIG. 4 and FIG. The prior determination unit corresponds to the main control unit 401 that executes the preliminary determination process with reference to FIG. In addition, the “effect mode” in this paragraph is a concept including the first reference mode to the third reference mode and the first stage to the third stage in this specification in addition to the effect mode shown in FIG. The special effect corresponds to an execution effect suggesting effect in the specification.

  According to the configuration, at least the first special symbol suggesting that a special effect (reach effect) is performed and the mode / stage execution effect after the non-special effect is performed (without the special effect). A second special symbol suggesting that it will be performed is displayed temporarily. Specifically, the mode / stage execution effect is a high expectation mode execution effect, a stage change execution effect, a latent / small hit mode execution effect, or a probability change mode execution effect, and the first special symbol is specified (selected) ) Is performed, the first special symbol is specified and the special effect is executed, and when the second special symbol is specified (selected), the second special symbol is executed. After the non-special effect is executed, the mode / stage execution effect is executed. Therefore, the player can recognize that an effect associated with one of the special symbols is executed when a plurality of special symbols are temporarily stopped. Interest can be aroused, so the fun of gaming is improved.

/// Fourth Embodiment ///
The execution effect suggesting effect of the first embodiment includes a special symbol associated with the pseudo-continuous effect and a special symbol associated with the special effect as a special symbol to be temporarily stopped in the display area of the decorative symbol. The symbol is determined, and the effect associated with the special symbol selected (specified) by the selection effect is to be executed after the execution effect suggestion effect. The execution effect suggestion effect of the present embodiment is a special symbol including a special symbol associated with the pseudo-continuous effect and a special symbol associated with the pre-reading effect as a special symbol to be temporarily stopped in the display area of the decorative symbol. The case of determining will be described. In this embodiment, the pre-reading effect is a reserved change effect or a high expectation mode execution effect, which is an effect that is executed at the start of the next variation change, that is, after the change display of the special symbol of the current variation is stopped (decorative design This is an effect that is executed after the stop display is displayed.

  83 and 84 are explanatory diagrams showing aspects of the execution effect suggesting effect in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 83 (a), during the decorative display variation display in the three-column decorative symbol display area, as shown in FIG. 83 (b), in the left column of the three-column decorative symbol display area. The special symbol PD5 suggesting that the hold change effect is executed is temporarily stopped. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 83 (c), the special symbol PD4 suggesting that the pseudo-continuous effect is executed is temporarily stopped in the right column of the three columns of decorative symbol display areas. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 84 (a), the special symbol PD7 indicating that the high expectation mode execution effect is executed is temporarily stopped in the central column of the three decorative symbol display areas. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), it is suggested that one of the special symbols PD4, PD5, and PD7 temporarily stopped (in this embodiment, the special symbol PD5) is excluded from the options. After the selection effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 84 (c), the special symbol PD4 is selected from the three special symbols PD4, PD5, and PD7 temporarily stopped (the special symbol PD7 is added in addition to the special symbol PD5). An effect indicating that it has been excluded from the options is executed. If the special symbol PD4 is selected as shown in FIG. 84 (c), then a pseudo-continuous effect is executed.

  Hereinafter, the execution effect suggestion effect determination process in the present embodiment will be described along the flowchart of FIG. In the present embodiment, the right of the special figure determination is reserved for the prior determination target when the start condition is satisfied, and then for the special figure determination corresponding to the right image display region PR1 that has become the determination target TT due to the digestion of the prior reservation. The result of the judgment per special figure included in the pre-judgment result indicates a loss, and in the effect mode control judgment process in step S20003 in FIG. 35, the third reference mode flag without stage change is set. 48, the execution of the basic effect X1-4 (see FIG. 50) is determined as a basic effect in the basic effect determination process of step S20004-4-1. In the hold effect determination process of step S20004-4-2 in FIG. The execution of the hold effect Y-1 is determined as the hold effect, and the execution effect suggestion effect execution / non-execution decision of step S20004-4-3 in FIG. 48 is determined. In the process, the execution of the demonstration execution as an execution effect suggested effect suggests rendering Z-3-1 (see FIG. 60) is assumed to have been determined.

  In Step S20004-4-6-1, the CPU 431 specifies an execution effect and proceeds to Step S20004--4-6-2. In the present embodiment, as the execution effect, the pseudo-continuous effect A-1 is specified with reference to the effect content information determined in advance for the special figure determination information corresponding to the right image display region PR1.

  In Step S20004-4-6-2, the CPU 431 determines one effect from the execution effects as the selection target effect, and proceeds to Step S20004-4-6-3. In the present embodiment, the pseudo-continuous effect A-1 is determined as the selection target effect.

  In step S2000-4-4-6-3, CPU 431 determines whether or not the execution effect suggestion effect to be executed is execution effect suggestion effect Z-2-2 or Z-3-3. If the execution effect suggestion effect to be executed is not the execution effect suggestion effect Z-2-2 or Z-3-3 (No in step S20004-4-6-3), the process proceeds to step S20004-4-6-4. If the execution effect suggestion effect determined to be executed is the execution effect suggestion effect Z-2-2 or Z-3-3, the process proceeds to step S20004-4-6-6. In this embodiment, since execution of Z-3-1 is determined as an execution effect suggestion effect, the process proceeds to step S20004-4-6-4.

  In step S2000-4-4-6-4, CPU 431 determines one or two effects as selected non-target effects according to the execution effect suggestion effect to be executed, and proceeds to step S20004-4-6-5. In this embodiment, since execution of Z-3-1 is determined as the execution effect suggestion effect, the pending change effect and the first reference mode execution effect are determined as the selection non-target effects as the two selection non-target effects. To do.

  In Step S20004-4-6-5, the CPU 431 special symbols associated with the selection target effect determined in Step S20004-4-6-2 and the selection non-target effect determined in Step S20004-4-6-4. (In this embodiment, special symbols PD4, PD5, and PD7) are set as special symbols used for the execution effect suggesting effect. In addition, the CPU 431 sets in which decorative symbol display area each special symbol is temporarily stopped. In the present embodiment, the special symbols PD5, PD7, and PD4 are set to be temporarily stopped in the left column, the center column, and the right column in the three columns of decorative symbol display areas.

  After the process of step S20004-4-6-5, the process proceeds to step S20004-4-6-7, and the CPU 431 determines the selection effect. In the present embodiment, as the selection effect, the execution of the effect in which the special symbols PD5 and PD7 associated with the selected non-target effect are sequentially cut and the special symbol PD4 associated with the selection target effect remains. In this step, the CPU 431 also determines the timing for executing the selection effect. In this embodiment, the execution timing of the selection effect in which the special symbol PD4 is selected is before the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect A-1.

  As a first modification of the present embodiment, a case will be described in which execution execution suggestion effect Z-2-1 is determined in step S20004-4-3 in FIG. In this modification, a pseudo-continuous effect is determined as a selection target effect, and a hold change effect is determined as a non-selection effect. Then, a selection effect in which the special symbol PD4 is selected from the special symbol PD4 associated with the selection target effect and the special symbol PD5 associated with the selection non-target effect is executed (see FIG. 85).

  As a second modification of the present embodiment, the prior determination target is special figure determination information corresponding to the reserved figure display area QR2, and the determination result per special figure included in the preliminary determination result indicates a loss, In the effect mode control determination process in step S20003, the third reference mode flag without stage change is set, and in the basic effect determination process in step S20004-4-1 in FIG. 48, the basic effect X1-1 ( The execution of the hold effect Y-6 (see FIG. 52) is determined as the hold effect in the hold effect determination process of step S20004-4-2 of FIG. 48, and step S20004 of FIG. 48 is determined. In the execution effect suggestion effect execution / non-execution determination process of -4--3, the execution effect suggestion effect Z-3-1 (FIG. 60) is executed as the execution effect suggestion effect. Be described as the execution of irradiation) was determined. In the present modification, it is assumed that the effect contents are not determined in advance for the special figure determination information corresponding to the right image display area PR1 and the reserved image display area QR1. In this modification, the hold change effect included in the hold effect Y-6 is determined as the selection target effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect and the high expectation mode execution effect are determined as the selection non-target effects. Then, a selection effect is executed in which the special symbol PD5 is selected from the special symbol PD5 associated with the selection target effect and the special symbols PD4 and PD7 associated with the non-selection effect (see FIG. 86). In that case, the execution timing of the selection effect is executed as a hold change effect (effect in which the hold image QC1 displayed in the hold image display area QR2 is shifted to the hold image display area QR1 and changed to the hold image QC2). Before.

  As a third modification of the present embodiment, the prior determination target is special figure determination information corresponding to the reserved figure display region QR2, and the determination result per special figure included in the preliminary determination result indicates a loss, In the effect mode control determination process in step S20003, a setting reservation for setting the first reference mode flag is made after the end of the current fluctuation. In the basic effect determination process in step S20004-4-1 in FIG. The basic effect determined with reference to the basic mode basic effect content determination table is determined, and the hold effect Y-1 (see FIG. 52) as the hold effect in the hold effect determining process in step S20004-4-2 in FIG. In the execution effect suggestion effect execution / non-execution determination process in step S20004-4-3 in FIG. Run Run effect suggested effect Z-3-1 (see FIG. 60) is described as being determined as. In the present modification, it is assumed that the effect contents are not determined in advance for the special figure determination information corresponding to the right image display area PR1 and the reserved image display area QR1. In the present modification, the first reference mode execution effect is determined as the selection target effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect and the hold change effect are determined as the selection non-target effects. Then, a selection effect in which the special symbol PD7 is selected from the special symbol PD7 associated with the selection target effect and the special symbol PD4 or PD5 associated with the selection non-target effect is executed (see FIG. 87). In that case, the execution timing of the selection effect is before the first reference mode execution effect is executed (that is, before the start of the next fluctuation display).

  When the content of the effect is not determined in advance for the special determination information corresponding to the right image display area PR1, the execution effect suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 65 is executed during the effect start process shown in step S20007 of FIG. May be. As a fourth modified example of the present embodiment, a case will be described in which execution of a loss effect is determined as a selection target effect in the execution effect suggestion effect determination process executed in step S20007 of FIG. In this case, the loss effect is determined as the selection target effect, and the hold change effect and the pseudo-continuous effect are determined as the selection non-target effects. Then, a selection effect in which the special symbol PD6 is selected from the special symbol PD6 associated with the selection target effect and the special symbols PD4 and PD5 associated with the non-selection effect is executed (see FIG. 88). In this case, the execution timing of the selection effect is not particularly limited, but is set, for example, immediately before the special symbol fluctuation is stopped.

  According to the present embodiment, the special game determination means for performing the special game determination as to whether or not the special game is to be performed when the start condition is satisfied, and a plurality of effects by the effect symbol display means based on the result of the special game determination. An effect control means for displaying the symbols after being variably displayed, and a prior determination means for performing a prior determination as to whether or not to perform the special game before the special game determination is performed, the effect control means includes: A temporary stop means for temporarily stopping and displaying at least two or more effect symbols after variably displaying the plurality of effect symbols, and after the two or more effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, the two or more effect symbols are again displayed. After the pseudo-continuous effect control means for performing the special effect suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high after performing the pseudo-continuous effect to be displayed in a variable manner, and after the two or more effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, Above A non-pseudo continuous effect control means for performing a non-pseudo continuous effect that does not perform a similar continuous effect, and a special effect using the two or more effect symbols when the two or more effect symbols are temporarily displayed. And the temporary stop means is determined to perform the special game in the first special symbol or the prior determination that suggests that at least the pseudo-continuous effect is performed. It is possible to temporarily stop and display the second special symbol suggesting that, and when the pseudo-continuous effect is performed, the special effect control means is configured to display either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. After the temporary stop display, it is possible to perform a first special effect that identifies the first special symbol, and when the non-pseudo-continuous effect is performed, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. Any of these were temporarily stopped To, in response to said pre-determination result, it is possible to perform the second special effect specifying the second special symbol. The special game determination means corresponds to the main control unit 401 that performs a big hit lottery with reference to FIG. The effect control means corresponds to the effect control unit 403 that displays a predetermined background image on the image display unit 104 with reference to FIG. 4 and FIG. The prior determination unit corresponds to the main control unit 401 that executes the preliminary determination process with reference to FIG. The special effect corresponds to an execution effect suggesting effect in the specification.

  According to this configuration, at least the first special symbol that suggests that a pseudo-continuous effect is performed, and the first suggestion that a pre-reading effect is performed after execution of a non-pseudo-continuous effect (without performing the pseudo-continuous effect). 2 special symbols are displayed as a temporary stop. The pre-reading effect is specifically a pending change effect or a high expectation mode execution effect. When an effect in which the first special symbol is specified (selected) is executed, the first special symbol is specified and special. When the effect is executed and the effect of specifying (selecting) the second special symbol is executed, the pre-reading effect is executed after the second special symbol is specified and the non-pseudo-continuous effect is executed. Therefore, the player can recognize that an effect associated with one of the special symbols is executed when a plurality of special symbols are temporarily stopped. Interest can be aroused, so the fun of gaming is improved.

/// Fifth embodiment ///
The execution effect suggesting effect of the first embodiment includes a special symbol associated with the pseudo-continuous effect and a special symbol associated with the special effect as a special symbol to be temporarily stopped in the display area of the decorative symbol. The symbol is determined, and the effect associated with the special symbol selected (specified) by the selection effect is to be executed after the execution effect suggestion effect. The execution effect suggesting effect of the present embodiment includes a special symbol associated with the pseudo-continuous effect and a special symbol associated with the mode / stage execution effect as a special symbol to be temporarily stopped in the display area of the decorative symbol. A case where a special symbol to be included is determined will be described. In the present embodiment, the mode / stage execution effect is the above-described high expectation mode execution effect, stage change execution effect, latent / small hit mode execution effect, probability change mode execution effect, and these are the fluctuation start of the next variation An effect that is sometimes executed, that is, an effect that is executed after the change display of the special symbol of the current change is stopped (after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a broken pattern).

  FIG. 89 and FIG. 90 are explanatory diagrams showing the execution effect suggesting effects in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 89 (a), during the decorative display variation display in the three-column decorative symbol display area, as shown in FIG. 89 (b), in the left column of the three-column decorative symbol display area. The special symbol PD9 suggesting that the latent / small hit mode execution effect is executed is temporarily stopped. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 89 (c), the special symbol PD4 suggesting that the pseudo-continuous effect is executed is temporarily stopped in the right column of the three columns of decorative symbol display areas. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 90 (a), the special symbol PD3 suggesting that the high expectation reach effect is executed is temporarily stopped in the central column of the three decorative symbol display areas. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), after a selection effect is executed that suggests that any one of the three temporarily stopped special symbols PD3, PD4, and PD9 is selected, FIG. As shown in c), the effect indicating that the special symbol PD9 is selected from the three temporarily stopped special symbols PD3, PD4, and PD9 is executed. If the special symbol PD9 is selected as shown in FIG. 90 (c), then the latent / small hit mode execution effect is executed.

  Hereinafter, the execution effect suggestion effect determination process in the present embodiment will be described along the flowchart of FIG. In the present embodiment, the right of the special figure determination is reserved for the prior determination target when the start condition is satisfied, and then for the special figure determination corresponding to the right image display region PR1 that has become the determination target TT due to the digestion of the prior reservation. Information, the determination result per special figure included in the pre-determination result is a big hit, and the special symbol determination result indicates a short-latency hit, and the stage in the effect mode control determination process of step S20003 in FIG. The third reference mode flag that is not changed is set, and the basic effect content is determined based on the basic effect content determination table dedicated to the short-term latency in the basic effect determination process of step S20004-4-1 in FIG. Thus, for example, execution of a basic effect that does not include a pseudo-continuous effect and a special effect is determined, and the hold effect determination in step S20004-4-2 in FIG. In fact, execution of the hold effect Y-1 is determined as the hold effect, and in the execution effect suggestion effect execution / non-execution determination process in step S20004-4-3 of FIG. 48, the execution effect suggestion effect Z- Assume that execution of 3-1 (see FIG. 60) has been determined.

  In Step S20004-4-6-1, the CPU 431 specifies an execution effect and proceeds to Step S20004--4-6-2. In the present embodiment, as the execution effect, the latent / small hit mode execution effect based on the prior determination result of the special figure determination information corresponding to the right image display region PR1 is specified.

  In Step S20004-4-6-2, the CPU 431 determines one effect from the execution effects as the selection target effect, and proceeds to Step S20004-4-6-3. In the present embodiment, the latent / small hit mode execution effect is determined as the selection target effect.

  In step S2000-4-4-6-3, CPU 431 determines whether or not the execution effect suggestion effect to be executed is execution effect suggestion effect Z-2-2 or Z-3-3. If the execution effect suggestion effect to be executed is not the execution effect suggestion effect Z-2-2 or Z-3-3 (No in step S20004-4-6-3), the process proceeds to step S20004-4-6-4. If the execution effect suggestion effect determined to be executed is the execution effect suggestion effect Z-2-2 or Z-3-3, the process proceeds to step S20004-4-6-6. In this embodiment, since execution of Z-3-1 is determined as an execution effect suggestion effect, the process proceeds to step S20004-4-6-4.

  In step S2000-4-4-6-4, CPU 431 determines one or two effects as selected non-target effects according to the execution effect suggestion effect to be executed, and proceeds to step S20004-4-6-5. In this embodiment, since execution of Z-3-1 is determined as the execution effect suggestion effect, the pseudo-continuous effect and the high expectation reach effect are determined as the selection non-target effects as the two selection non-target effects. .

  In Step S20004-4-6-5, the CPU 431 special symbols associated with the selection target effect determined in Step S20004-4-6-2 and the selection non-target effect determined in Step S20004-4-6-4. (In this embodiment, special symbols PD3, PD4, and PD9) are set as special symbols used for the execution effect suggesting effect. In addition, the CPU 431 sets in which decorative symbol display area each special symbol is temporarily stopped. In the present embodiment, the special symbols PD9, PD3, and PD4 are set to be temporarily stopped at the left column, the center column, and the right column in the three columns of decorative symbol display areas.

  After the process of step S20004-4-6-5, the process proceeds to step S20004-4-6-7, and the CPU 431 determines the selection effect. In the present embodiment, as a selection effect, the player is requested to press the effect button 118 within the operation effective period of the effect button 118, and when the effect button 118 is pressed within the operation effective period, the player presses it. When the special symbol associated with the selection target effect is selected in accordance with the timing of the operation and the effect button 118 is not pressed within the operation effective period, it is associated with the selection target effect after the operation effective period has elapsed. An effect in which a special symbol is selected is executed. In this step, the CPU 431 also determines the timing for executing the selection effect. In the present embodiment, the execution timing of the selection effect in which the special symbol PD9 is selected is before the latent / small hit mode execution effect is executed (that is, before the start of the next fluctuation display).

  The execution effect suggesting effect of the present embodiment is the same effect even when the result of determination per special figure included in the preliminary determination result for the special figure determination information corresponding to the right image display area PR1 indicates a small hit. It is feasible.

  As a first modification of the present embodiment, a case will be described in which execution execution suggestion effect Z-2-1 is determined in step S20004-4-3 in FIG. In this modification, the latent / small hit mode execution effect is determined as the selection target effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect is determined as the non-selection effect. Then, a selection effect in which the special symbol PD9 is selected from the special symbol PD9 associated with the selection target effect and the special symbol PD4 associated with the selection non-target effect is executed. (See FIG. 91).

  As a second modification of the present embodiment, a case will be described in which the pseudo-continuous A-1 is determined as a selection target effect in step S20004--4-6-2 in FIG. In this modified example, the pseudo-continuous effect is determined as the selection target effect, and the latent / small hit mode execution effect and the high expectation reach effect are determined as the selection non-target effects. Then, a selection effect is executed in which the special symbol PD4 is selected from the special symbol PD4 associated with the selection target effect and the special symbols PD3 and PD9 associated with the selection non-target effect (see FIG. 92). In that case, the execution timing of the selection effect is before the pseudo-continuous effect is executed.

  As a third modification of the present embodiment, the result of the special figure determination included in the result of the pre-determination process for the special figure determination information corresponding to the right image display region PR1 is a jackpot and the result of the special figure determination Indicates the probability variation short hit, and in the effect mode control determination process of step S20003 in FIG. 35, the third reference mode flag is set without changing the stage, and in the basic effect determination process in step S20004-4-1 of FIG. The basic effect content is determined based on the basic effect content determination table dedicated to the probability variation short-term, for example, execution of the basic effect not including the pseudo-continuous effect and the special effect is determined, and step S20004-4-2 in FIG. 48, the execution of the hold effect Y-1 (see FIG. 52) is determined as the hold effect, and step S2 in FIG. In executing effect suggested effect execution and non-execution determination processing of 004-4-3, execution of demonstration execution as an execution effect suggested effect suggests rendering Z-3-1 (see FIG. 60) is assumed to have been determined. In this modification, a case will be described in which the probability variation mode execution effect is determined as the selection target effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect and the high expectation reach effect are determined as the selection non-target effects. In this case, as the selection effect, a selection effect in which the special symbol PD10 is selected from the special symbol PD10 associated with the selection target effect and the special symbols PD3 and PD4 associated with the non-selection effect is executed. (See FIG. 93). In this case, the execution timing of the selection effect is before the probability variation mode execution effect is executed (that is, before the start of the next fluctuation display).

  As a fourth modified example of the present embodiment, the prior determination target is special figure determination information corresponding to the reserved image display area QR2, and the determination result per special figure included in the preliminary determination result indicates a loss, and FIG. In the effect mode control determination process in step S20003, a setting reservation for setting the first reference mode flag is made after the end of the fluctuation display of the current fluctuation. In the basic effect determination process in step S20004-4-1 in FIG. The basic effect determined with reference to the basic effect content determination table for 1 standard mode is determined, and the hold effect Y-6 (see FIG. 52) is determined as the hold effect in the hold effect determining process in step S20004-4-2 in FIG. ) Is determined, and the execution of the execution effect suggestion effect Z-3-1 is determined as the execution effect suggestion effect. In addition, it is assumed that the effect contents are not determined in advance for the special figure determination information corresponding to the right symbol display area PR1 and the reserved image display area QR1. In this modification, the first reference mode execution effect is determined as the selection target effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect and the high expectation reach effect are determined as the selection non-target effects. Then, a selection effect in which the special symbol PD7 is selected from the special symbol PD7 associated with the selection target effect and the special symbols PD3 and PD4 associated with the selection non-target effect is executed (see FIG. 94). In that case, the execution timing of the selection effect is before the first reference mode execution effect is executed (that is, before the start of the next fluctuation display).

  As a fifth modified example of the present embodiment, the advance determination target is special figure determination information corresponding to the reserved image display area QR1, and the determination result per special figure included in the advance determination result indicates a loss, which is illustrated in FIG. In the effect mode control determination process in step S20003, the third reference mode flag is set and a setting reservation for setting the second stage mode flag is made after the end of the current fluctuation display (that is, the current stage is the first stage). In step S20004-4-1 in FIG. 48, the basic effect X1-1 (see FIG. 50) is determined to be executed as the basic effect, and step S20004-4-2 in FIG. 48 is suspended. In the effect determination process, for example, the reserved image area is based on a reserved effect content determination table (not shown) for zero prior reservation as the hold effect. The hold image QC1 is displayed in R1, and the hold effect for displaying the right image PR1 in the right image display region PR1 is determined. In the execution effect suggestion effect execution / non-execution determination process in step S20004-4-3 in FIG. The case where execution of the execution effect suggestion effect Z-3-1 is determined as the execution effect suggestion effect will be described. It is assumed that the effect content is not determined in advance for the special figure determination information corresponding to the right symbol display area PR1. In this modification, the stage change execution effect is determined as the selection target effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect and the high expectation reach effect are determined as the selection non-target effects. Then, a selection effect in which the special symbol PD8 is selected from the special symbol PD8 associated with the selection target effect and the special symbols PD3 and PD4 associated with the selection non-target effect is executed (see FIG. 95). In this case, the execution timing of the selection effect is before the stage change execution effect is executed (that is, before the start of the next fluctuation display).

  When the content of the effect is not determined in advance for the special determination information corresponding to the right image display area PR1, the execution effect suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 65 is executed during the effect start process shown in step S20007 of FIG. May be. As a sixth modified example of the present embodiment, a case will be described in which execution of a loss effect is determined as a selection target effect in the execution effect suggestion effect determination process executed in step S20007 of FIG. In this modification, the loss effect is determined as the selection target effect, and the latent / small hit mode execution effect and the pseudo-continuous effect are determined as the selection non-target effects. Then, a selection effect in which the special symbol PD6 is selected from the special symbol PD6 associated with the selection target effect and the special symbols PD4 and PD9 associated with the non-selection effect is executed (see FIG. 96). In this case, the execution timing of the selection effect is not particularly limited, but is set, for example, immediately before the special symbol fluctuation is stopped.

  According to the present embodiment, the special game determination means for performing the special game determination as to whether or not the special game is to be performed when the start condition is satisfied, and a plurality of effects by the effect symbol display means based on the result of the special game determination. Effect control means for displaying the symbols in a variable manner and then stopping the display. The effect control means sets one of the effect modes among the plurality of effect modes, and is currently set when a predetermined condition is satisfied. An effect mode setting means for shifting from the effect mode to another effect mode, and when a predetermined effect mode is set, at least two effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed after the plurality of effect symbols are variably displayed. After the temporary stop means and the two or more effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, the pseudo-continuous effect is displayed in which the two or more effect symbols are variably displayed again. A pseudo-continuous effect control means for performing a special effect that suggests a high degree, and a non-pseudo continuous effect that does not perform the pseudo-continuous effect after the two or more effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed. Continuous production control means, and special production control means for performing special production using the two or more production symbols when the two or more production symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the temporary stop means Is capable of temporarily stopping and displaying at least a first special symbol indicating that the pseudo-continuous effect is performed or a second special symbol indicating that the effect mode is shifted, and the special effect control means When the pseudo-continuous effect is performed, after the first special symbol and the second special symbol are both temporarily stopped and displayed, the first special effect for specifying the first special symbol is performed. Is possible and before When the non-pseudo effect is performed, it is possible to cause the second special effect to specify the second special symbol after both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed. Yes, the production mode setting means can shift from the production mode currently set to another production mode after the second special production is performed. The special game determination means corresponds to the main control unit 401 that performs a big hit lottery with reference to FIG. The effect control means corresponds to the effect control unit 403 that displays a predetermined background image on the image display unit 104 with reference to FIG. 4 and FIG. The prior determination unit corresponds to the main control unit 401 that executes the preliminary determination process with reference to FIG. In addition, the “effect mode” in this paragraph is a concept including the first reference mode to the third reference mode and the first stage to the third stage in this specification in addition to the effect mode shown in FIG. The special effect corresponds to an execution effect suggesting effect in the specification.

  According to this configuration, the mode / stage execution effect is performed at least after the first special symbol suggesting that the pseudo-continuous effect is performed, and after the non-simulated continuous effect is performed (after the pseudo-continuous effect is not performed). The second special symbol suggesting this is displayed temporarily. Specifically, the mode / stage execution effect is a high expectation mode execution effect, a stage change execution effect, a latent / small hit mode execution effect, or a probability change mode execution effect, and the first special symbol is specified (selected) ) Is executed, the first special symbol is specified and the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. When the second special symbol is specified (selected), the second special symbol is executed. After the symbol is specified and the non-pseudo continuous effect is executed, the mode / stage execution effect is executed. Therefore, the player can recognize that an effect associated with one of the special symbols is executed when a plurality of special symbols are temporarily stopped. Interest can be aroused, so the fun of gaming is improved.

/// Sixth embodiment ///
The execution effect suggesting effect of the first embodiment includes a special symbol associated with the pseudo-continuous effect and a special symbol associated with the special effect as a special symbol to be temporarily stopped in the display area of the decorative symbol. The symbol is determined, and the effect associated with the special symbol selected (specified) by the selection effect is to be executed after the execution effect suggestion effect. The execution effect suggestion effect of the present embodiment includes a special symbol associated with the pre-reading effect and a special symbol associated with the mode / stage execution effect as a special symbol to be temporarily stopped in the display area of the decorative symbol. A case where a special symbol is determined will be described. In the present embodiment, the prefetching effect is a pending change effect. The mode / stage execution effects are the above-described high expectation mode execution effects, stage change execution effects, latent / small hit mode execution effects, and probability change mode execution effects. Both the pre-reading effect and the mode / stage execution effect are effects that are executed at the start of the next fluctuation, that is, after the change display of the special symbol of the current change is stopped (after the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a disjointed manner) ) Is performed.

  97 and 98 are explanatory diagrams showing aspects of the execution effect suggesting effect in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 97 (a), during the decorative display variation display in the three-column decorative symbol display area, as shown in FIG. 97 (b), in the left column of the three-column decorative symbol display area. The special symbol PD9 suggesting that the latent / small hit mode execution effect is executed is temporarily stopped. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 97 (c), the special symbol PD5 that suggests that the hold change effect is executed is temporarily stopped in the right column of the display region of the three columns of decorative symbols. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 98 (a), the special symbol PD3 suggesting that the high expectation reach effect is executed is temporarily stopped in the center column of the display region of the three columns of decorative symbols. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), after a selection effect is executed to suggest that any one of the temporarily stopped three special symbols PD3, PD5, and PD9 is selected, FIG. As shown in c), an effect indicating that the special symbol PD9 is selected from the three temporarily stopped special symbols PD3, PD5, and PD9 is executed. If the special symbol PD9 is selected as shown in FIG. 98 (c), then the latent / small hit mode execution effect is executed.

  Hereinafter, the execution effect suggestion effect determination process in the present embodiment will be described along the flowchart of FIG. In the present embodiment, the right of the special figure determination is reserved for the prior determination target when the start condition is satisfied, and then for the special figure determination corresponding to the right image display region PR1 that has become the determination target TT due to the digestion of the prior reservation. Information, the determination result per special figure included in the pre-determination result is a big hit, and the special symbol determination result indicates a short-latency hit, and the stage in the effect mode control determination process of step S20003 in FIG. The third reference mode flag that is not changed is set, and the basic effect content is determined based on the basic effect content determination table dedicated to the short-term latency in the basic effect determination process of step S20004-4-1 in FIG. Thus, for example, execution of a basic effect that does not include a pseudo-continuous effect and a special effect is determined, and the hold effect determination in step S20004-4-2 in FIG. In fact, execution of the hold effect Y-1 (see FIG. 52) is determined as the hold effect, and is executed as the execution effect suggestion effect in the execution effect suggestion effect execution / non-execution determination process in step S20004-4-3 of FIG. It is assumed that the execution of the effect suggestion effect Z-3-1 (see FIG. 60) is determined.

  In Step S20004-4-6-1, the CPU 431 specifies an execution effect and proceeds to Step S20004--4-6-2. In the present embodiment, as the execution effect, the latent / small hit mode execution effect based on the prior determination result of the special figure determination information corresponding to the right image display region PR1 is specified.

  In Step S20004-4-6-2, the CPU 431 determines one effect from the execution effects as the selection target effect, and proceeds to Step S20004-4-6-3. In the present embodiment, the latent / small hit mode execution effect is determined as the selection target effect.

  In step S2000-4-4-6-3, CPU 431 determines whether or not the execution effect suggestion effect to be executed is execution effect suggestion effect Z-2-2 or Z-3-3. If the execution effect suggestion effect to be executed is not the execution effect suggestion effect Z-2-2 or Z-3-3 (No in step S20004-4-6-3), the process proceeds to step S20004-4-6-4. If the execution effect suggestion effect determined to be executed is the execution effect suggestion effect Z-2-2 or Z-3-3, the process proceeds to step S20004-4-6-6. In this embodiment, since execution of Z-3-1 is determined as an execution effect suggestion effect, the process proceeds to step S20004-4-6-4.

  In step S2000-4-4-6-4, CPU 431 determines one or two effects as selected non-target effects according to the execution effect suggestion effect to be executed, and proceeds to step S20004-4-6-5. In this embodiment, since execution of Z-3-1 is determined as the execution effect suggestion effect, the pending change effect and the high expectation reach effect are determined as the selection non-target effects as the two selection non-target effects. .

  In Step S20004-4-6-5, the CPU 431 special symbols associated with the selection target effect determined in Step S20004-4-6-2 and the selection non-target effect determined in Step S20004-4-6-4. (In this embodiment, special symbols PD3, PD5, and PD9) are set as special symbols used for the execution effect suggesting effect. In addition, the CPU 431 sets in which decorative symbol display area each special symbol is temporarily stopped. In the present embodiment, the special symbols PD9, PD3, and PD5 are set to be temporarily stopped at the left column, the center column, and the right column in the three columns of decorative symbol display areas.

  After the process of step S20004-4-6-5, the process proceeds to step S20004-4-6-7, and the CPU 431 determines the selection effect. In the present embodiment, as a selection effect, the player is requested to press the effect button 118 within the operation effective period of the effect button 118, and when the effect button 118 is pressed within the operation effective period, the player presses it. When the special symbol associated with the selection target effect is selected in accordance with the timing of the operation and the effect button 118 is not pressed within the operation effective period, it is associated with the selection target effect after the operation effective period has elapsed. An effect in which a special symbol is selected is executed. In this step, the CPU 431 also determines the timing for executing the selection effect. In the present embodiment, the execution timing of the selection effect in which the special symbol PD9 is selected is before the latent / small hit mode execution effect is executed (that is, before the start of the next fluctuation display).

  The execution effect suggesting effect of the present embodiment is the same effect even when the result of determination per special figure included in the preliminary determination result for the special figure determination information corresponding to the right image display area PR1 indicates a small hit. It is feasible.

  As a first modification of the present embodiment, a case will be described in which execution execution suggestion effect Z-2-1 is determined in step S20004-4-3 in FIG. In this modification, the latent / small hit mode execution effect is determined as the selection target effect, and the hold change effect is determined as the non-selection effect. Then, a selection effect in which the special symbol PD9 is selected from the special symbol PD9 associated with the selection target effect and the special symbol PD5 associated with the selection non-target effect is executed. (See FIG. 99).

  As a second modification of the present embodiment, the result of the special figure determination included in the result of the preliminary determination process for the special figure determination information corresponding to the right image display area PR1 is a big hit and the result of the special figure design determination Indicates the probability variation short hit, and in the effect mode control determination process of step S20003 in FIG. 35, the third reference mode flag is set without changing the stage, and in the basic effect determination process in step S20004-4-1 of FIG. The basic effect content is determined based on the basic effect content determination table dedicated to the probability variation short-term, for example, execution of the basic effect not including the pseudo-continuous effect and the special effect is determined, and step S20004-4-2 in FIG. 48, the execution of the hold effect Y-1 (see FIG. 52) is determined as the hold effect, and step S2 in FIG. In executing effect suggested effect execution and non-execution determination processing of 004-4-3, execution of demonstration execution as an execution effect suggested effect suggests rendering Z-3-1 (see FIG. 60) is assumed to have been determined. In this modification, a case will be described in which the probability variation mode execution effect is determined as the selection target effect, and the hold change effect and the high expectation reach effect are determined as the selection non-target effects. In that case, as the selection effect, a selection effect in which the special symbol PD10 is selected from the special symbol PD10 associated with the selection target effect and the special symbols PD3 and PD5 associated with the selection non-target effect is executed ( (See FIG. 100). In this case, the execution timing of the selection effect is before the probability variation mode execution effect is executed (that is, before the start of the next fluctuation display).

  As a third modified example of the present embodiment, the prior determination target is special figure determination information corresponding to the hold image display area QR2, and the determination result per special figure included in the preliminary determination result indicates a loss, and FIG. In the effect mode control determination process in step S20003, a setting reservation for setting the first reference mode flag is made after the end of the fluctuation display of the current fluctuation. In the basic effect determination process in step S20004-4-1 in FIG. The basic effect determined with reference to the basic effect content determination table for 1 standard mode is determined, and the hold effect Y-6 (see FIG. 52) is determined as the hold effect in the hold effect determining process in step S20004-4-2 in FIG. ) Is determined, and the execution of the execution effect suggestion effect Z-3-1 is determined as the execution effect suggestion effect. In addition, it is assumed that the effect contents are not determined in advance for the special figure determination information corresponding to the right symbol display area PR1 and the reserved image display area QR1. In this modification, the first reference mode execution effect is determined as the selection target effect, and the hold change effect and the high expectation reach effect are determined as the selection non-target effects. Then, a selection effect is executed in which the special symbol PD7 is selected from the special symbol PD7 associated with the selection target effect and the special symbols PD3 and PD5 associated with the non-selection effect (see FIG. 101). In that case, the execution timing of the selection effect is before the first reference mode execution effect is executed (that is, before the start of the next fluctuation display).

  As a fourth modified example of the present embodiment, the prior determination target is special figure determination information corresponding to the reserved image display area QR1, and the determination result per special figure included in the preliminary determination result indicates a loss, and FIG. In the effect mode control determination process in step S20003, the third reference mode flag is set and a setting reservation for setting the second stage mode flag is made after the end of the current fluctuation display (that is, the current stage is the first stage). In step S20004-4-1 in FIG. 48, the basic effect X1-1 (see FIG. 50) is determined to be executed as the basic effect, and step S20004-4-2 in FIG. 48 is suspended. In the effect determination process, for example, the reserved image area is based on a reserved effect content determination table (not shown) for zero prior reservation as the hold effect. The hold image QC1 is displayed in R1, and the hold effect for displaying the right image PR1 in the right image display region PR1 is determined. In the execution effect suggestion effect execution / non-execution determination process in step S20004-4-3 in FIG. The case where execution of the execution effect suggestion effect Z-3-1 is determined as the execution effect suggestion effect will be described. It is assumed that the effect content is not determined in advance for the special figure determination information corresponding to the right symbol display area PR1. In this modification, the stage change execution effect is determined as the selection target effect, and the hold change effect and the high expectation reach effect are determined as the selection non-target effects. Then, a selection effect in which the special symbol PD8 is selected from the special symbol PD8 associated with the selection target effect and the special symbols PD3 and PD5 associated with the selection non-target effect is executed (see FIG. 102). In this case, the execution timing of the selection effect is before the stage change execution effect is executed (that is, before the start of the next fluctuation display).

  As a fifth modification of the present embodiment, the prior determination target is special figure determination information corresponding to the reserved figure display area QR2, and the determination result per special figure included in the preliminary determination result indicates a loss, as shown in FIG. In the effect mode control determination process in step S20003, the third reference mode flag without stage change is set, and in the basic effect determination process in step S20004-4-1 in FIG. 48, the basic effect X1-1 ( The execution of the hold effect Y-6 (see FIG. 52) is determined as the hold effect in the hold effect determination process of step S20004-4-2 of FIG. 48, and step S20004 of FIG. 48 is determined. In the execution effect suggestion effect execution / non-execution determination process of -4--3, the execution effect suggestion effect Z-3-1 (FIG. 60) is executed as the execution effect suggestion effect. Be described as the execution of irradiation) was determined. In the present modification, it is assumed that the effect contents are not determined in advance for the special figure determination information corresponding to the right image display area PR1 and the reserved image display area QR1. In this modification, the hold change effect included in the hold effect Y-6 is determined as the selection target effect, and the hold change effect and the high expectation mode execution effect are determined as the selection non-target effects. Then, a selection effect in which the special symbol PD5 is selected from the special symbol PD5 associated with the selection target effect and the special symbols PD3 and PD9 associated with the selection non-target effect is executed (see FIG. 103). In that case, the execution timing of the selection effect is executed as a hold change effect (effect in which the hold image QC1 displayed in the hold image display area QR2 is shifted to the hold image display area QR1 and changed to the hold image QC2). Before.

  When the content of the effect is not determined in advance for the special determination information corresponding to the right image display area PR1, the execution effect suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 65 is executed during the effect start process shown in step S20007 of FIG. May be. As a sixth modified example of the present embodiment, a case will be described in which execution of a loss effect is determined as a selection target effect in the execution effect suggestion effect determination process executed in step S20007 of FIG. In this modification, the loss effect is determined as the selection target effect, and the latent / small hit mode execution effect and the hold change effect are determined as the selection non-target effects. Then, a selection effect in which the special symbol PD6 is selected from the special symbol PD6 associated with the selection target effect and the special symbols PD5 and PD9 associated with the non-selection effect is executed (see FIG. 104). In this case, the execution timing of the selection effect is not particularly limited, but is set, for example, immediately before the special symbol fluctuation is stopped.

  According to the present embodiment, the special game determination means for performing the special game determination as to whether or not the special game is to be performed when the start condition is satisfied, and a plurality of effects by the effect symbol display means based on the result of the special game determination. An effect control means for displaying the symbols after being variably displayed, and a prior determination means for performing a prior determination as to whether or not to perform the special game before the special game determination is performed, the effect control means includes: An effect mode setting means for setting any effect mode among a plurality of effect modes and shifting from the currently set effect mode to another effect mode when a predetermined condition is established, and a predetermined mode is set. A special effect control means for performing a special effect suggesting that the degree of expectation for the special game is high after the plurality of effect symbols are variably displayed, and the predetermined effect mode includes: A temporary stop means for temporarily stopping and displaying at least two or more effect symbols after the plurality of effect symbols are variably displayed when the two or more effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed. A non-special effect control means for performing a non-special effect without performing an effect, and a special effect for performing a special effect using the two or more effect symbols when the two or more effect symbols are temporarily displayed. Control means, and the temporary stop means suggests that at least the first special symbol or the effect mode indicating that it is determined to perform the special game in the prior determination is shifted. The second special symbol can be temporarily stopped and displayed, and the special effect control means displays both the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the non-special effect is performed. After It is possible to perform either the first special effect that specifies the first special symbol or the second special effect that specifies the second special symbol according to the result of the pre-article determination. The mode setting means can shift from the currently set effect mode to another effect mode after the second special effect is performed. The special game determination means corresponds to the main control unit 401 that performs a big hit lottery with reference to FIG. The effect control means corresponds to the effect control unit 403 that displays a predetermined background image on the image display unit 104 with reference to FIG. 4 and FIG. The prior determination unit corresponds to the main control unit 401 that executes the preliminary determination process with reference to FIG. In addition, the “effect mode” in this paragraph is a concept including the first reference mode to the third reference mode and the first stage to the third stage in this specification in addition to the effect mode shown in FIG.

  According to the configuration, at least the first special symbol suggesting that the hold change effect is performed after the non-special effect is performed, and the mode stage execution effect is performed after the non-special effect is performed. A second special symbol that suggests a temporary stop display. Specifically, the mode / stage execution effect is a high expectation mode execution effect, a stage change execution effect, a latent / small hit mode execution effect, or a probability change mode execution effect, and the first special symbol is specified (selected) ) Is executed, the first special symbol is specified and the hold change effect is executed. When the second special symbol is specified (selected), the second special symbol is executed. After the symbol is specified and the non-pseudo continuous effect is executed, the mode / stage execution effect is executed. Therefore, the player can recognize that an effect associated with one of the special symbols is executed when a plurality of special symbols are temporarily stopped. Interest can be aroused, so the fun of gaming is improved.

/// Supplementary matters ///
The execution effect suggestion effect may be executed only when the target effect mode is a specific mode (for example, when it is the reference mode), or may be executed in all modes. Further, the execution effect suggestion effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 60 may be composed of a plurality of execution effect suggestion effect execution determination tables determined according to the prior determination result of the prior determination target. For example, when the result of the determination per special figure indicates a big hit, the execution effect suggesting effects Z-2-2 and Z-3-3 are more likely to be executed than when the result of the determination per special figure indicates a loss. Can be set to

  In the execution effect suggestion effects Z-2-1 and Z-2-2, in the above embodiment, the special symbols are displayed in the left column and the right column in the three columns of decorative symbol display areas. It is not limited. It may be the left column and the center column, or the center column and the right column, or may be selectively determined from these.

  In the decorative symbol display area, the method of temporarily stopping and displaying the special symbol instead of the normal decorative symbol is not particularly limited. For example, a part of the decorative symbol in which the special symbol that is temporarily stopped is variably displayed is displayed. It is good also as carrying out temporary stop display after the said special symbol appears in a decoration symbol display area. In addition, a special symbol is placed on the back of a specific decorative symbol, and after the specific decorative symbol appears in the decorative symbol display area, the special decorative symbol appears by rotating the specific decorative symbol, and then temporarily stops. It is good as well.

  In the above embodiment, when the basic effect includes the pseudo-continuous effect and the special effect, the pseudo-continuous effect is specified as the execution effect in step S20004-4-6-1 in FIG. 65, and the special effect is set as the execution effect. Although not specified, the special effect may also be specified as the execution effect, and the special effect may be determined as the selection target effect in step S2000-4-4-2. When the basic effect includes one pseudo-continuous effect and a special effect, the execution timing of the selected effect in which the pseudo-continuous effect is determined as the selection target effect is a temporary stop of the decorative design before the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. Temporary stop of the decorative design before the special effect is executed after the pseudo-continuous effect is executed and the variation display of the decorative pattern is resumed. It's time. When the pseudo-continuous effects are executed two or more times, it is possible to execute a selection effect in which the pseudo-continuous effects are determined as the selection target effects before each pseudo-continuous effects. It is also possible to execute both the selection effect determined as the selection target effect and the selection effect determined as the effect. As described above, the greater the number of times the pseudo-continuous performance is executed, the higher the expectation of the jackpot, and the selection effect is executed at a timing at which the pseudo-continuous performance can be executed. It is possible to suggest that the game will continue, and the interest of the game will improve.

  If the result of the judgment per special figure included in the preliminary judgment result of the judgment object is a big hit and the result of the special figure judgment is a short chance of latent probability, and the result of the judgment per special figure is a big hit In addition, when the result of the special symbol design determination is the probability variation short hit, when the effect content is determined in advance for the special figure determination information to be pre-determined, it is only for the latent probability short strike and the probability variation short strike. Referring to the dedicated basic effect content determination table, in the above embodiment, the execution of the basic effect not including the pseudo-continuous effect and the special effect is determined, but the basic effect including the pseudo-continuous effect and the special effect is determined. May be included. If the basic effect includes a pseudo-continuous effect or a special effect, the execution effect suggesting effect with the latent / small hit mode execution effect or the probability variation mode execution effect as the selection target effect may not be executed. In such a case as well, it is possible to execute an execution effect suggestion effect that uses the latent / small hit mode execution effect or the probability variation mode execution effect as a selection target effect.

  Further, the execution effect suggestion effect having the latent / small hit mode execution effect as the selection target effect can be executed even when the result of the determination per special figure included in the prior determination result of the prior determination target is the small hit. However, when determining the effect content for the special figure determination information to be determined in advance, the basic effect content determination table dedicated to small hits (the basic effect content determination table dedicated to small hits is The basic production content determination table shown in FIG. An effect or a special effect may be included. In addition, when the basic effect includes a pseudo-continuous effect or a special effect, the execution effect suggesting effect having the latent / small hit mode execution effect as the selection target effect may not be executed. In addition, an execution effect suggestion effect that uses the latent / small hit mode execution effect as a selection target effect may be executable.

  In the execution effect suggesting effects shown in the above embodiments, the combination of special symbols displayed on the image display unit 104 is merely an example, and any combination is possible as long as the special symbols shown in FIG. 57 are used. In addition, in the execution effect suggestion effect Z-3-1, two different effects are determined as selection non-target effects, and different special symbols associated with each effect are used, but one effect is determined, Two special symbols associated with the performance may be used.

/// Deformation etc.///
The embodiment of the present invention can be appropriately modified in various ways within the scope of the technical idea shown in the claims. The above embodiment is merely an example of the embodiment of the present invention, and the meaning of the term of the present invention or each constituent element is not limited to that described in the above embodiment. The specific numerical values shown in the above description are merely examples, and as a matter of course, they can be changed to various numerical values.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the present invention is applied to the old first-class type pachinko gaming machine has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to other types (for example, the old-kind two-kind mixed type) pachinko gaming machine. The present invention may be applied to other game machines such as slot machines that are not classified as pachinko gaming machines. In a pachinko gaming machine, a game ball is used as a game medium, while in a slot machine, a coin is used as a game medium.

  In addition, regarding the respective flowcharts, the order of the processes described above is merely an example, and the execution order of a plurality of processes can be arbitrarily changed or a plurality of processes can be executed in parallel without departing from the scope of the present invention.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 Game machine 103 Game area 105, 106 Starting port 401 Main control part (Special game determination means, prior determination means, reservation means)
403 Production control unit (production control means)

Claims (1)

Special game determination means for performing a special game determination as to whether or not to perform a special game upon establishment of a start condition;
Based on the result of the special game determination, effect control means for performing effects using a plurality of effect symbols on the effect symbol display means,
Pre-determining means for performing a pre-determination of whether or not to perform the special game before the special game determination is performed,
The effect control means sets any effect mode among a plurality of effect modes, and effects mode setting means for shifting from the currently set effect mode to another effect mode when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
Special effect control means for performing a special effect using two or more effect symbols when a predetermined effect mode is set;
After the special effect, a special effect control means for performing a special effect suggesting that the degree of expectation for the special game is high;
A non-special effect control means for performing a non-special effect without performing the special effect after the special effect;
Wherein the two or more performance symbols, the pre first special symbol suggesting that there may have been determined to perform the special game in the determination, a second special suggests that the effect mode is shifted When the third special symbol suggesting that there is a possibility that the special effect will be performed, and when the third special symbol is included while the first special symbol and the second special symbol are included. When not included,
The special effect control means includes:
When the non-special effect is performed, after the two or more effect symbols including the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed on the effect symbol display means, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. Among the symbols, there are a case where a first special effect that specifies the first special symbol is performed and a case where a second special effect that specifies the second special symbol is performed.
When the special effect is performed, after the first special symbol, the second special symbol and the third special symbol are displayed on the effect symbol display means, the first special symbol, the second special symbol and the Of the third special symbols, there may be a third special effect that identifies the third special symbol.
The production mode setting means, after the second special production is performed, shifts from the currently set production mode to another production mode.